all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 |
|
Addendum Page User Manual | Users Manual | 310.56 KiB | July 04 2004 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
Ex8 | Users Manual | 2.08 MiB | / September 02 2007 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
Ex8a User Manual | Users Manual | 2.21 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
Ex8b User Manual | Users Manual | 355.95 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | / September 02 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | / September 02 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | / September 02 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | / September 02 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | / September 02 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | / September 02 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | / September 02 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | / September 02 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | / September 02 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | / September 02 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | / September 02 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Attestation Statements | / September 02 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | External Photos | / September 02 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos | / September 02 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Internal Photos | / September 02 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 3 | External Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 | Internal Photos | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | July 04 2004 | ||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 3 | External Photos |
1 2 3 | Addendum Page User Manual | Users Manual | 310.56 KiB | July 04 2004 |
Portable Radio Product Operation and EME Exposure Approved Accessories For a list of approved Motorola accessories call 1-800-453-0920, or visit our website at www.motorola.com/iden. ALL MODELS WITH FCC ID AZ489FT5830 MEET THE GOVERNMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radiofrequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg.1 Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions reviewed by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that is does not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this model phone when tested for use at the ear is 1.06 W/kg and when tested on the body, as described in this user guide, is 1.09 W/kg during packet data transmission. (Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and FCC requirements.)2 While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement for safe exposure. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID AZ489FT5830. Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA) web-site at http://www.wow-com.com. 1 In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. 121
1 2 3 | Ex8 | Users Manual | 2.08 MiB | / September 02 2007 |
Motorola iDEN Digital Multi-service Data-capable Phone i325 Phone Users Guide
@NNTN5837A@
NNTN5837A IMPORTANT NOTICE: PLEASE READ PRIOR TO USING YOUR PHONE The SIM card provided in this kit is intended for use with the phone provided in this package. Loss of certain features will result when using a SIM card from one of the following models: i30sx, i35s, i50sx, i55sr, i58sr, i60c, i80s, i85s, i88s, i90c, i95cl series, and the i2000 series. For more information on SIM card compatibility, go to www.motorola.com/iden/support. Defects or damage to your Motorola phone that result from the use of non-Motorola branded or certified Accessories, including but not limited to replacement housings and or other peripheral accessories, are excluded from warranty coverage. Please refer to the text of Motorola's Limited One Year warranty located in this users guide for complete details. Contents Getting Started........................................... 1 Removing the Battery Door ...............................2 Locating Your SIM Card....................................3 Activating Service..............................................6 Antenna .............................................................6 Maintaining Durability........................................6 Powering On and Off.........................................6 Enabling Over-the-Air Security..........................7 Finding Your Phone Number.............................8 Phone Basics ....................................................9 SIM Card Security ...........................................12 Locking the Keypad.........................................15 Accessories.....................................................16 For More Information.......................................16 Making Calls............................................. 17 Phone Calls.....................................................17 Private Calls ....................................................17 Receiving Calls................................................17 Call Icons.........................................................18 Ways to Enter Calls.........................................18 Using Speakerphone.......................................20 Using Mute ......................................................21 Making Emergency Phone Calls .....................21 MOTOtalkTM ..............................................22 Channels and Codes.......................................23 Private MOTOtalk Calls...................................25 Emergency Calls Using MOTOtalk .................26 Setup Options .................................................26 Call Alerts..................................................28 Sending Call Alerts..........................................28 Receiving Call Alerts .......................................28 Using the Call Alert Queue..............................28 Recent Calls ..............................................30 Storing Recent Calls to Contacts ....................30 Deleting Recent Calls......................................31 Contacts ....................................................32 Viewing Contacts ............................................33 Creating Entries ..............................................34 Storing Numbers Faster ..................................36 i Editing Entries .................................................36 Deleting Entries ...............................................36 Checking Capacity ..........................................37 Creating Pauses and Waits.............................37 International Numbers .....................................37 Accessing Contacts with GSM Phones...........38 Call Forwarding........................................ 39 Forwarding All Calls ........................................39 Turning Off Call Forwarding ............................40 Forwarding Missed Calls .................................40 Viewing Call Forwarding Settings....................41 Additional Calling Options...................... 42 Call Waiting .....................................................42 Call Hold..........................................................43 Making a 3-Way Call .......................................43 Creating Pauses and Waits While Dialing.......44 Making International Calls ...............................44 Setting One Touch PTT...................................44 Group Calls .....................................................45 Call Timers ......................................................46 Using Your Phone as a Modem ......................47 ii Making TTY Calls............................................48 Memo .........................................................50 Ring Tones ................................................51 Setting Your Phone to Vibrate.........................51 Turning Ring Tones Off...................................51 Ring and Vibrate .............................................52 Assigning Ring Tones to Contacts ..................53 Viewing Ring Tone Assignments ....................53 Downloading More Ring Tones .......................53 Managing Memory ..........................................53 Deleting Custom Ring Tones ..........................54 Entering Text ............................................55 Using Alpha Mode...........................................55 Using Word Mode ...........................................55 Special Function Keys.....................................56 Using Numeric Mode.......................................57 Using Symbols Mode ......................................57 Messages ..................................................58 Message Notifications .....................................58 Message Center ..............................................59 Voice Mail Messages ............................... 60 Receiving a Message......................................60 Accessing Voice Mail from the Message Center ...................................60 Sending Unanswered Calls to Voice Mail .......60 MOSMS Messages ................................... 61 Setting Up........................................................61 Receiving a Message......................................61 Reading from the Message Center .................62 Creating and Sending Messages ....................62 Managing Memory...........................................66 Advanced Features.................................. 67 Group Calls, Talkgroups, and Hubs ................67 Emergency Group Calls ..................................69 Isolated Operation ...........................................70 Call Alert Status Messages .............................71 Java Applications .................................... 72 Installing Applications......................................72 Running Applications.......................................72 Suspending Applications .................................72 Resuming Applications....................................73 Ending Applications.........................................73 Downloading Applications ...............................73 Deleting Applications.......................................73 Managing Memory ..........................................74 Shortcuts on the Main Menu ...........................74 Java Applications and GPS Enabled ..............75 GPS Enabled.............................................78 IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind ............78 Making an Emergency Call .............................79 Viewing Your Approximate Location ...............80 Enhancing GPS Performance .........................81 Updating Satellite Almanac Data ....................83 Setting Privacy Options...................................83 Using GPS with Map Software........................84 Voice Records ..........................................87 Creating Voice Records ..................................87 Playing Voice Records ....................................87 Labeling Voice Records ..................................88 Deleting Voice Records...................................88 Locking Voice Records ...................................88 Managing Memory ..........................................88 iii Using a Headset .....................................102 Attaching a Headset......................................102 Using a Remote PTT Button .........................102 Understanding Status Messages ..........103 Safety and General Information ............105 RF Operational Characteristics .....................105 Portable Radio Product Operation and EME Exposure...................................................105 Electro Magnetic Interference/Compatibility..108 Medical Devices ............................................108 Operational Warnings ...................................109 Operational Cautions ....................................110 Intrinsically Safe Radio Information...............111 Accessory Safety Information .......................114 Customizing Your Phone ........................ 90 Setting the Volume..........................................90 Setting Your Phone to Not Ring ......................90 Seeing the Display Better................................91 Using Settings .................................................91 Profiles ..................................................... 95 Viewing Profiles...............................................95 Switching Profiles ............................................95 Surveillance Profile..........................................96 How Changing Settings Affects Profiles..........96 Temporary Profiles ..........................................97 Creating Profiles..............................................97 Editing Profiles ................................................98 Deleting Profiles ..............................................98 Setting Call Filtering ........................................98 Shortcuts ................................................ 100 Creating a Shortcut .......................................100 Using a Shortcut............................................100 Editing a Shortcut ..........................................101 Deleting Shortcuts .........................................101 iv MOTOROLA LIMITED WARRANTY ...... 116 Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products
(International) ..................................... 120 Patent and Trademark Information ...... 124 Index ....................................................... 125 Driving Safety Tips ................................ 130 v DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola, Inc. Address: 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard Plantation, FL 33322 USA Phone Number: 1 (800) 453-0920 Hereby declares that the product:
Product Name: i325 Model Number: H68XAH6RR1AN Conforms to the following regulations:
FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device As a personal computer peripheral, this device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. vi Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Getting Started volume controls Push-To-Talk
(PTT) button speaker
(in back) Emergency Group call button;
speaker on/off audio jack p Power button. Navigation key press the arrows to scroll through menus and lists. m Menu key accesses context-sensitive menus. A Option key selects the option appearing above it on the display. s Send key places phone calls. e End key ends phone calls; returns to idle screen. microphone accessory connector 1 GettingStarted To start using your i325 phone:
Make sure your SIM card is in place.
Charge the battery.
Activate your service.
Enable security. Removing the Battery Door 1 Make sure the phone is powered off. See Powering On and Off on page 6. 2 Slide the release button forward until it releases the battery door. Note: If the release button does not slide forward to release the battery door, rotate the circular piece in the center of the release button to unlock it. release button 3 Remove the battery door from the back of your phone. speaker 2 LocatingYourSIMCard Battery Inserting the Battery 1 Remove the battery door. 2 Insert the top of the battery into the battery area. Press the bottom of the battery to secure it. 3 Replace the battery door and press it gently until you hear a click. Locating Your SIM Card Your SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card is a small piece of plastic located in the SIM card holder in the back of your phone, underneath the battery. SIM card SIM card holder If your SIM card is not in the SIM card holder, it may be in the box your phone came in, attached to a piece of plastic about the size of a credit card. If this is the case, carefully detach your SIM card from the surrounding plastic and insert it as described in Inserting Your SIM Card on page 14. If there is no SIM card in your phone or the box, contact your service provider. 3 GettingStarted 4 If you want to ensure the battery door does not accidentally come off, rotate the circular piece in the center of the release button to lock it. 3 Plug the other end of the charger into the accessory connector. Charging the Battery Your phone comes with a standard travel charger. 1 Plug the charger into an electrical outlet. 2 Open the connector cover. connector cover Charger Attached appears on the display. Tip: To remove the charger from the accessory connector: Press the buttons on the sides of the plug. Pull the plug straight out. 4 When charging the battery for the first time, charge for 30 minutes longer than the time shown in Charging Times on page 5. 4 Charging Times See your battery and charger to determine the appropriate charging time. Battery High Performance Extra Capacity Maximum Capacity Charger Rapid 2 hours Mid-Rate 4 hours 2.5 hours 6 hours 3.5 hours 7.5 hours For best results, charge the batteries within the temperature range of 50F to 104F (10C to 40C). Prolonged charging is not recommended. Removing the Battery 1 With the phone powered off, remove the battery door. LocatingYourSIMCard 2 Remove the battery by pushing the battery toward the antenna and lifting it out. Battery Use and Maintenance
The Motorola iDEN Approved Lithium Ion chargers provide optimum performance. Other chargers may not fully charge the iDEN Lithium Ion battery or may yield a reduced number of lifetime charge cycles.
Extreme temperatures degrade battery performance. Do not store the battery where temperatures exceed 140F (60C) or fall below 4F (-20C). Lithium Ion batteries have a self discharge rate and without use, lose about 1% of their charge per day.
The battery capacity is degraded if the battery is stored for long periods while fully charged. If long term storage is required, store at half capacity. 5
GettingStarted Activating Service The first time you power on your phone, you must be in your local calling area. This activates your service. Antenna Attach the phone antenna before using your phone. The antenna must be screwed in completely for proper operation and water resistance. Attaching the Antenna 1 Place the antenna into the antenna socket. antenna socket 2 Press and turn antenna clockwise until it will no longer turn. 6 Removing the Antenna 1 Grip the antenna firmly and turn it counter-clockwise until it is loose. 2 Remove the antenna from the antenna socket. Maintaining Durability To maintain the water resistant nature of your phone:
Attach the phone antenna before using your phone.
Always reinsert the audio jack cover and bottom connector cover. Powering On and Off To power your phone on:
Press p. To power your phone off:
Press and hold p. When You Power On for the First Time The first time you power your phone on, a screen may appear asking you to update your browser information. This means you must enable security. If the Enter SIM PIN Code screen appears, enter your SIM PIN. See Entering the PIN on page 12. Press A under Ok. When you receive your phone, the SIM PIN is 0000. Change your PIN to prevent fraudulent use of the SIM card (see Changing the PIN on page 12). As your phone connects to the network, you will see a connecting message. When the idle screen appears, the phone is ready to use. b EnablingOver-the-AirSecurity Enabling Over-the-Air Security If you are set up to receive over-the-air programming from your service provider, you must enable security the first time you power on your phone or within 20 days of first activation of your phone:
1 When you power on your phone for the first time, after the idle screen appears, you will be prompted to select Ok to update your browser information. Note: If you press A under Later, you will be prompted to enable security each time you power on your phone until you press A under Ok. 2 Press A under Ok. 3 You are prompted to enable security. Press A under Yes. A series of screens appears. If you subscribe to your service providers plan, your home page appears. 4 Press e to return to the idle screen. Within 24 hours of enabling security, you will receive a Net alert containing your Private ID and Talkgroup lists for Private calls. 7 GettingStarted To accept programming:
1 When you receive a Net alert saying New Browser Message - Receive Programming Info, press A under Goto. 2 You are prompted to accept changes to your lists. Press A under Ok. 3 If you are prompted again to accept changes to your lists, press A under Ok. 4 A confirmation screen displays. Press A under Ok. 5 Press e to return to the idle screen. Finding Your Phone Number My Info lets you view your phone number, Private ID, and other phone information:
1 Press m to access the main menu. 2 Scroll to My Info. 3 Press A under Select. 4 Scroll to see your information:
Name Enter your name. See Entering Text on page 55.
Line 1 and Line 2 your phone numbers for phone lines 1 and 2. These are filled in when you receive your first phone call after enabling over-the-air security on your phone. 8
Private ID Your Private ID is the number that others use to contact you using Private calls. It is filled in when you receive your first Private call.
Group ID the number of the Hub you have joined.
Carrier IP the IP address assigned to your service provider. It is filled in when you register for packet data services. IP1 Address and IP2 Address the IP addresses you use to access the Internet with your phone.
Ckt Your circuit data number is the number you use if you want to use your phone to transfer circuit data. See Using Your Phone as a Modem on page 47. You receive this number from your service provider. Note: The context-sensitive menu under My Info contains information that may be used by your service provider if there is a problem with your phone.
Phone Basics Any time your phone is powered on, the display provides you with information and options. b status icons text area menu icon display options The screen shown above is the idle screen. The text that appears on your idle screen depends on your service provider. The idle screen appears when your phone is on, but not engaged in any activity. Text Area This area displays menus, messages, names, phone numbers, and other information. PhoneBasics Display Options Two display options appear at the bottom of most screens. You select a display option by pressing the option key below it. Menus and Lists Your phones features are arranged in menus, submenus, and lists. To access the items in a menu or list, scroll using the navigation key at the top of your keypad. This key lets you scroll up, down, left, or right. Holding down the appropriate part of the navigation key speeds up scrolling. In this guide, this symbol > tells you to select a menu or list item. For example, Settings >
Security means:
1 Scroll to Settings on the main menu. 2 Press A under Select to see the Settings screen. 3 Scroll to Security. 4 Press A under Select to see the Security screen. 9 GettingStarted Menu Key Many features provide context-sensitive menus that let you access related features and actions. The S icon appears any time a context-sensitive menu is available. Press m to access the menu. Main Menu All your phones features can be accessed through the main menu. When you are using a feature, the icon for that feature appears in the upper left corner of the display. a Net j Java Apps s Settings v VoiceRecord C Contacts e Messages Browse the Web. Java applications on your phone. See page 72. Customize your phone. See page 90. Record and play audio messages. See page 87. View, store, edit contacts. See page 32. Access messages. See page 58. 10 f Call Forward g Memo h Call Timers i Recent Calls c Shortcuts P Profiles j My Info k Call Alert g GPS m Ring Tones Set call forwarding options. See page 39. Store a number to access later. See page 50. Phone usage information. See page 46. Lists recent calls. See page 30. Create shortcuts to screens. See page 100. Groups of settings you apply together. See page 95. View personal phone information, including phone number and Private ID. See page 8. Lists call alerts. See page 28. Find your approximate geographical location. See page 78. Assign ring tones and turn ringer off. See page 51. V Voice Recog m MOTOtalk/MT Options Used with voice-activated dialing and shortcuts. See page 20 and page 100. Launch/Exit MOTOtalk Access MOTOtalk Setup and Help. See page 22. Status Icons Status icons appear in the two rows at the top of the display. Some appear at all times. Others appear only when your phone is engaged in certain activities or when you have activated certain features. a b c d e f g d o p q r s A B Battery Strength More bars on the battery indicate a greater charge. Signal Strength More bars next to the antenna indicate a stronger signal. Phone In Use Your phone is active on a phone call. Private In Use Your phone is active on a Private call. C 1 2 m S T e GHI J KL PhoneBasics Talkgroup In Use Your phone is active on a group call. Active Phone Line 1 indicates phone line 1 is ready to make calls; 2 indicates phone line 2 is ready to make calls. MOTOtalk Your phone is set to MOTOtalk mode. Scan Your phone is set to receive Group calls from all the Talkgroups in a Hub. Talkgroup Icon Your phone is active as a group call Emergency Group Call Your phone is active on an Emergency Group call. Call Forward Your phone is set to forward calls. See Call Forwarding on page 39. uvMR Ringer Off Your phone is set not to ring. See Turning Ring Tones Off on page 51. wy x Messages You have one or more messages. See Messages on page 58. 11 GettingStarted D YZ P Internet You are ready to browse the internet. Packet Data You are ready to transfer packet data or are transferring packet data. See Using Your Phone as a Modem on page 47. Roaming You are using your phone outside your carrier's network. SIM Card Security Your SIM card protects your personal information. The SIM card stores all your Contacts information. Since this information is stored on your SIM card, not in your phone, you can remove the information by removing your SIM card. Note: Except for making emergency phone calls, your phone will not function without the SIM card. To prevent unauthorized use of your phone, your SIM card is protected by a PIN that you enter each time the phone is powered on. You can change the PIN or turn off the requirement that it be entered. 12 Entering the PIN You may be required to enter a SIM PIN when you first use your phone. When you receive your phone, the SIM PIN is 0000. Change your PIN to prevent fraudulent use of the SIM card. Important: If you enter your PIN incorrectly 3 times, your SIM card is blocked. To unblock your SIM card, you must contact your service provider. See Unblocking the PIN on page 13. 1 When the Enter SIM PIN Code screen appears, enter your SIM PIN. An asterisk appears for each character entered. 2 Press A under Ok. Changing the PIN 1 From the main menu, select Settings >
Security > Change Password > SIM PIN. 2 At the Enter Old SIM PIN Code screen, enter the current SIM PIN. 3 Press A under Ok. 4 At the Enter New SIM PIN Code screen, enter the new 4 to 8-digit SIM PIN. 5 Press A under Ok. 6 At the Re-enter New SIM PIN Code screen, re-enter the new SIM PIN to confirm. 7 Press A under Ok. Turning the PIN Requirement On and Off When the SIM PIN requirement is on, you are prompted to enter your PIN each time you turn on your phone. Note: If a SIM PIN is required, your phone will not function until the SIM PIN is entered, except for making emergency phone calls. When the PIN requirement is off, your phone can be used without entering a PIN. Important: When the SIM PIN requirement is off, the personal data on your SIM card is not protected. Anyone can use your phone and access your personal data. 1 From the main menu, select Settings >
Security > SIM PIN. 2 Select On or Off. 3 Enter the current SIM PIN. 4 Press A under Ok. SIMCardSecurity Unblocking the PIN If you enter your PIN incorrectly 3 times, your SIM card is blocked. To unblock your SIM card, you must contact your service provider to get a PIN Unblock Code (PUK). Important: If you unsuccessfully enter the PUK code 10 times, your SIM card is permanently blocked and must be replaced. If this happens, all data is lost. You will get a message to contact your service provider. Except for making emergency phone calls, your phone will not function with a blocked SIM card. To unblock the PIN:
1 Press * # m 1. 2 At your service provider representatives request, provide the information needed to give you a PUK code. 3 Select Unblock PIN. 4 Enter the PUK code. 5 Enter a new 4 to 8-digit SIM PIN. 6 Re-enter your SIM PIN. If you entered the codes properly, SIM Unlocked appears on the display. 13 Inserting Your SIM Card With your phone powered off, remove the battery door and battery. See Removing the Battery on page 5. 1 Hold your SIM card as shown. Do not touch the gold-colored area. cut corner 2 Carefully slide your SIM card into your phone, until it lies flat in the SIM card holder. SIM card holder GettingStarted Inserting and Removing Your SIM Card Important: Do not touch the gold-colored areas of your SIM card. Switching SIM Cards Moving your SIM card from one phone to another moves all your Contacts information, but erases other information. If you remove your SIM card and use it with another phone, or use another SIM card with your phone, the following information is erased:
The recent calls list
Call forwarding settings
Net alerts
Mobile originated text messages, drafts, and quick notes Information stored in Memo 3 most recent GPS Enabled locations
Voice records
Voice names 14
Removing Your SIM Card Important: To avoid loss or damage, do not remove your SIM card from your phone unless absolutely necessary. 1 With your phone powered off, remove the battery door and battery. 2 While holding the tab down, slide your SIM card out of the SIM card holder. SIM card holder tab Note: Protect your SIM card as you would any delicate object. Store it carefully. LockingtheKeypad Locking the Keypad Locking the phones keypad prevents its buttons from being pressed. When the keypad is locked, you can only:
Power the phone on and off
Unlock the keypad
Respond to incoming calls, messages, and alerts Important: Emergency phone calls cannot be placed while the keypad is locked. To lock the keypad:
1 From the idle screen, press m. 2 Press *. If you press a key while the keypad is locked, instructions for unlocking the keypad display briefly. To unlock the keypad:
1 From the idle screen, press m. 2 Press *. While the keypad is locked, you can respond to incoming calls, messages, and alerts just as you do when the keypad is not locked. When finished, press e to return to the idle screen. The keypad remains locked. 15 GettingStarted Accessories To order accessories, log on to our Web site at www.motorola.com/store/iden or contact your Motorola Authorized Retailer. For More Information If you have questions about your i325 phone, contact your sales representative or your service provider. 16 Making Calls Your i325 phone makes two types of calls: digital cellular phone calls and Private calls. With Private calls, you use your phone as a long-range, digital walkie-talkie. Phone Calls 1 Enter the number you want to call. 2 Press s to place the call. 3 Press e to end the call. Private Calls 1 Enter the Private ID you want to call. 2 Press and hold the PTT button on the side of your phone. Begin talking after your phone emits a chirping sound. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. Tip: To let someone know you want to talk to him or her on a Private call, send a call alert. See Call Alerts on page 28. Receiving Calls Phone Calls When you receive a phone call, your phone rings, vibrates, or lights up its backlight. Answering Press s. -or-
Press A under Yes. -or-
Press any number key. To answer a call by pressing any number key, you must have the Any Key Ans feature turned on (see Phone Calls Features on page 91). Sending to Voice Mail Press e. -or-
Press A under No. Ending Press e. Private Calls When you receive a Private call, your phone emits a chirping sound or vibrates. Answering 1 Wait for the caller to finish speaking. 17 MakingCalls 2 Press and hold the PTT button on the side of your phone. Begin talking after your phone emits a chirping sound. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. Call Icons When you make a call, call icons appear in the text area of the phones display. X Placing a phone call. W Receiving a phone call. Y Phone call is active. Z Phone call is on hold. U Phone call ended. When you miss a call, this icon appears in the text area:
V You missed a phone call. Ways to Enter Calls To enter the number you want to call, you can:
Use the numbers on the keypad
Select the number from the recent calls list 18
Select the number from Contacts
Redial the last phone number called
Say a voice name into your phone
Use Speed Dial or Turbo Dial
Use One Touch PTT to make a Private call
Use a TTY device see Making TTY Calls on page 48 From the Keypad To enter the number you want to call, press the numbers on the keypad. If you make a mistake:
To clear a digit, press A under Delete.
To clear all digits, press and hold A under Delete.
To insert or delete a digit anywhere in the string of digits you have entered, scroll left or right.
To cancel, press e. From the Recent Calls List The recent calls list stores the last 20 calls you made or received, except Emergency Group calls. To select a number from the recent calls list as the number you want to call:
1 From the idle screen, scroll down. -or-
From the main menu, select Recent Calls. 2 Scroll to the name or number you want to call. From Contacts If you have numbers stored in Contacts, you can use these numbers to make calls. For information on entering numbers into Contacts, see Creating Entries on page 34. Calling from the Contacts List 1 From the main menu, select Contacts. 2 Scroll to the name or number you want to call. Tip: To find Contacts entries faster, use the keypad to enter the first letter of the name. 3 Place the call now. -or-
Scroll left or right to display the Contacts type for the number you want to call. If you are making a Private call, your phone places the call to the Private ID stored in the Contacts entry, even if the Private icon is not displayed. If you are making a phone call:
WaystoEnterCalls
Your phone places the call to the phone number assigned to the Contacts type displayed. If the Contacts type displayed is not a phone number, your phone places the call to the phone number stored in the Contacts entry. If the Contacts type displayed is not a phone number and you have more than one phone number stored in the Contacts entry, your phone prompts you to select the phone number you want to place the call to. Calling from a Contacts Entry 1 From the main menu, select Contacts. 2 Scroll to the name or number you want to call. 3 Press A under View. -or-
If View is not one of your options: Press m. Select View. 4 Place the call now. -or-
Scroll to view more numbers. When you place the call, it is made to the number displayed. Redialing the Last Number Press and hold s to place a call to the last phone number you called. 19
MakingCalls Using a Voice Name Note: This is an optional feature. Contact your service provider about its availability for purchase. If you have created a voice name in Contacts for the number you want to call, you can say the voice name into your phone to enter the number. See page 33 for more information about voice names. To use a voice name:
1 Press and hold t until a prompt appears telling you to say the voice name. 2 Speaking into the microphone, say the voice name assigned to the number you want to call. Your phone plays the name back to you. If you are making a phone call, the call is placed automatically. Tip: To stop a phone call from being completed, press e. If you are making a Private call, press and hold the PTT button to place the call. Using Speed Dial and Turbo Dial Each phone number stored in Contacts is assigned a Speed Dial number which you can use to enter that number. 20 Speed Dial 1 From the idle screen, use the keypad to enter the Speed Dial number assigned to the phone number you want to call. 2 Press #. 3 Press s. Turbo Dial From the idle screen, press and hold the Speed Dial number (1 through 9) assigned to the phone number you want to call. Using One Touch PTT One Touch PTT sets your phone to call the most recent Private ID on the recent calls list, or a Private ID you choose, every time you press the PTT button. See Setting One Touch PTT on page 44. Using Speakerphone Note: This is an optional feature. Contact your service provider about its availability for purchase. Turning on speakerphone makes incoming sound come out of the phones speaker instead of the earpiece. Speakerphone is available whenever you are on an active phone call. To turn speakerphone on or off:
Press under A under Spkr. -or-
Press t. Using Mute Muting calls lets you listen to incoming sound without transmitting sound. Mute is available whenever you are on an active call. To turn mute on:
Press A under Mute. While mute is on, Unmute appears as a display option. To turn mute off:
Press A under Unmute. Making Emergency Phone Calls Your phone supports emergency calling. Emergency phone calls can be made even when your SIM card is blocked or not in your phone. Dial 911 to be connected to an emergency response center. If you are on an active call, you must end it before calling 911. UsingMute When you make an emergency call, your phones GPS Enabled feature can help emergency service personnel find you, if you are in a location where your phone's GPS antenna has established a clear view of the open sky and your local emergency response center has the equipment to process location information. See GPS Enabled on page 78, and particularly IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind on page 78 and Making an Emergency Call on page 79, for more information on the limitations of this feature. Because of the limitations of this feature, always provide your best knowledge of your location to the emergency response center when you make an emergency call. Important: Emergency phone calls cannot be placed while the keypad is locked. Important: If you have not registered on the network, emergency calls cannot be placed while your SIM card is in your phone. 21 MOTOtalkTM MOTOtalk allows direct two-way phone-to-phone communications between two or more phones equipped for MOTOtalk. You can make and receive MOTOtalk calls even when network service is not available. You can talk to anyone on your code and channel within your range. Note: Range will vary based on terrain, man-made structures and atmospheric conditions. MOTOtalk allows you to:
Use code or private mode operation
Use up to 10 channels
Communicate with standalone MOTOtalk radios Note: MOTOtalk is not compatible with older Family Radio Services products. The following features and main menu items will not be available while in MOTOtalk:
On-network phone calls
On-network Private calls
Data transmission Incoming message notification
Musical ring tones 22
Call forwarding
Messages
Call Timers
Call alerts
Voice records Using MOTOtalk To set your phone to MOTOtalk:
1 From the main menu, scroll to MOTOtalk and press A under Select. 2 Select Go to MOTOtalk. Switching to MOTOtalk Please Wait displays. After a few seconds, the MOTOtalk idle screen appears. MT Ready appears on the first line of the display. The code you are set to appears on the second line of the display. The channel you are set to appears on the third line of the display. Note: When switching from the network to MOTOtalk, the last channel and code that were set appear on the MOTOtalk idle screen. While in MOTOtalk, this icon m appears on the display, indicating that there is no network signal and MOTOtalk is active.
Exiting MOTOtalk To set your phone to network mode when MOTOtalk is active:
1 From the MOTOtalk idle screen, press m. 2 Scroll to MT Options and press A under Select. 3 Select Exit MOTOtalk. Switching to Network Please Wait displays. After a few seconds, the network idle screen appears. Talk Range Phones used in MOTOtalk mode should be a minimum of 6 feet apart to maximize performance and improve transmission range. Channels and Codes Your phone has 10 channels and 15 codes. Channels are divided into sets of frequencies that allow you to make and receive MOTOtalk calls. Other parties may also be talking on the same channel. Codes help minimize interference from unwanted messages and other disturbances when you are on the same channel as others. ChannelsandCodes To have a conversation, all parties must be on the same channel and code. For private MOTOtalk calls, the person you are calling must be in MOTOtalk and set to the same channel to receive your call. Note: When making a code call, all parties that are on your code and channel can hear your conversation. To set a channel:
1 From the MOTOtalk idle screen, press A under Edit. 2 Scroll to Channel. 3 Press A under Edit. 4 Select a channel. 5 When you are finished, press A under Back to return to the MOTOtalk idle screen. To set a code:
1 From the MOTOtalk idle screen, press A under Edit. 2 Scroll to Code. 3 Press A under Edit. 4 Select a code. 5 When you are finished, press A under Back to return to the MOTOtalk idle screen. 23 MOTOtalkTM Making and Receiving Code Calls in MOTOtalk To make a code call in MOTOtalk:
1 Press and hold the PTT button. MT Transmit appears on the first line of display. Begin speaking after your phone emits the MOTOtalk tone. 2 Release the PTT button to listen. The tone emitted from your phone when using MOTOtalk is 4 beeps and sounds different from the standard tone heard with on-network Private and group calls. If you receive an error message:
There may be no parties on your channel or code.
You are out of range. When you receive a code call using MOTOtalk, MT Receive appears on the first line of the display. Note: An incoming MOTOtalk call can be terminated at any time by pressing e. 24 Receive All You can set your phone to receive MOTOtalk transmissions from any phone that is set to the same channel, regardless of the code (1-15), by setting the code to Receive All. When you receive transmissions with the code set to Receive All, the display changes from Receive All to the code on which the transmission was received. Tip: You can reply to an incoming call within 6 seconds after hearing the short ending beep by pressing the PTT button. Note: You cannot initiate a code call when the code is set to Receive All. If you press the PTT button with the code set to Receive All, you will receive an error message. To set the code to Receive All:
1 From the MOTOtalk idle screen, press A under Edit. 2 Scroll to Code. 3 Press A under Edit. 4 Select Receive All. 5 When you are finished, press A under Back to return to the MOTOtalk idle screen. Private MOTOtalk Calls You can have a private conversation with another person using MOTOtalk. When on a private MOTOtalk call, no other parties can hear your conversation. In order to make a private MOTOtalk Call, you must use the valid 10-digit Personal Telephone Number (PTN) of the person you are calling. The person you are calling must be in MOTOtalk and set to the same channel to receive your call. If you receive an error message:
You may not be using a valid PTN.
The person that you are trying to reach may not be in MOTOtalk.
The person that you are trying to reach is set to a different channel or is out of range. Private Only To limit MOTOtalk to private conversation only, set your code to Private Only. In this mode, code calls will be ignored and only private calls can be made or received. Note: You will be required to enter a valid PTN before pressing the PTT button. PrivateMOTOtalkCalls To set the code to Private Only:
1 From the MOTOtalk idle screen, press A under Edit. 2 Scroll to Code. 3 Press A under Edit. 4 Select Pvt Only. Making a Private MOTOtalk Call 1 Enter the 10-digit PTN of the person you want to call on your channel. -or-
Scroll to a number or name in Contacts. -or-
Scroll to a number in the recent calls list. 2 Press and hold the PTT button. Begin speaking after your phone emits the MOTOtalk tone. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. The number or name of the person you are calling will appear in the first line of the display. Receiving a Private MOTOtalk Call The number or name of the person who initiated the call will appear in the first line of the display. Note: You can reply within 6 seconds simply by pressing the PTT button. 25 MOTOtalkTM Ending a Private MOTOtalk Call A private MOTOtalk call will end if there is no communication for 6 seconds. Note: A private MOTOtalk call may be interrupted during the 6 second idle time by another code call or private call. The display will return to the MOTOtalk idle screen. Emergency Calls Using MOTOtalk Emergency phone calls can still be made even when you are not connected to network service. Dial 911 to be connected to an emergency response center. If you are on an active MOTOtalk call, you must end it before calling 911. Setup Options MOTOtalk setup options are available in the MT Options screen in both network and MOTOtalk modes. To access Setup Options in network:
1 From the main menu, select MOTOtalk. 2 Select Setup. 26 To access Setup Options in MOTOtalk:
1 From the main menu, select MT Options. 2 Select Setup. You can set your phone to:
Launch directly into MOTOtalk when you select MOTOtalk from the main menu.
Notify you periodically with a tone that you are in MOTOtalk. Using Direct Launch To set your phone to launch MOTOtalk when you select MOTOtalk from the main menu:
1 From the Setup screen, scroll to Direct Launch and press A under Change. 2 Select On. Note: If Direct Launch is set to On, you will not see MT Options when you select MOTOtalk from the main menu. In order to have access to your setup options, Direct Launch must be set to Off. Or you can access setup options while in MOTOtalk by pressing m and selecting MT Options.
To turn off Direct Launch:
1 From the Setup screen, scroll to Direct Launch and press A under Change. 2 Select Off. Your phone now displays MT Options when you select MOTOtalk from the main menu. Using State Tone To set your phone to notify you with a tone that you are in MOTOtalk:
1 From the Setup screen, scroll to State Tone and press A under Change. 2 Select the time frame during which you want to be notified that you are in MOTOtalk. For example, if you select 1 hour, you will be notified every hour that you are in MOTOtalk. To turn off State Tone:
3 From the Setup screen, scroll to State Tone and press A under Change. 4 Select Off. SetupOptions 27 Call Alerts Sending a call alert lets the recipient know you want to talk to him or her on a Private call. When you send a call alert, the recipients phone emits a series of beeps, or vibrates, and displays your name or Private ID. The recipient can:
Answer begin a Private call with the sender
Queue store the call alert to the call alert queue, which is a list of call alerts
Clear dismiss and delete the call alert Sending Call Alerts 1 Enter the Private ID you want to send to, as you would when making a Private call. 2 Press A under Alert. Ready to Alert appears on the display. 3 Press the PTT button until Alert Successful appears on the display. Note: If the alert is not successful, this may mean the person you are trying to reach is on a call or has the phone turned off. Receiving Call Alerts When you receive a call alert, you must answer, queue, or clear it. You cannot receive phone calls or Private calls until you do. To answer a call alert, press the PTT button to make a Private call to the sender. To queue a call alert, press A under Queue. To clear a call alert, press A under Clear. Note: The recent calls list also stores call alerts you have received. They appear as Private calls. Call alerts remain in your recent calls list until you delete them or until they reach the end of the list. Using the Call Alert Queue When you queue a call alert, it remains in the call alert queue until you make a Private call to the sender or delete it. Viewing Call Alerts 1 From the main menu, select Call Alert. 2 Scroll through the list. 28 Viewing Date and Time To view the date and time a call alert was received:
1 From the main menu, select Call Alert. 2 Scroll to the call alert you want information on. 3 Press m. 4 Select View. Responding to Call Alerts in the Queue After you queue a call alert, you can respond to it by making a Private call to the sender or sending a call alert to the sender. Making a Private Call to the Sender 1 From the main menu, select Call Alert. 2 Scroll to the call alert you want to respond to. 3 Press the PTT button to begin the call. This removes the call alert from the queue. Sending a Call Alert to the Sender 1 From the main menu, select Call Alert. 2 Scroll to the call alert you want to respond to. 3 Press A under Alert. Ready to Alert appears on the display. 4 Press the PTT button until Alert Successful appears on the display. UsingtheCallAlertQueue Deleting Call Alerts To delete a call alert from the queue:
1 From the call alert queue, scroll to the call alert you want to delete. 2 Press m. 3 Select Delete. 4 Press A under Yes to confirm. To delete all call alerts from the queue:
1 From the call alert queue, press m. 2 From the call alert menu, select Delete All. 3 Press A under Yes to confirm. Sorting Call Alerts Tip: You must have at least one call alert in the queue to access this feature. To sort call alerts by the order they were received:
1 From the main menu, select Call Alert. 2 Press m. 3 Select Sort By. 4 Scroll to First on Top or Last on Top. 5 Press A under Select. 29 Recent Calls The recent calls list stores the numbers of the 20 most recent calls you have made and received. To view the recent calls list:
1 From the idle screen, press the down arrow on the navigation key. -or-
From the main menu, select Recent Calls. 2 Scroll through the list. If the number of a recent call is stored in Contacts, the name associated with the number appears on the recent calls list. An icon appears beside the name or number indicating the Contacts type of the number used in the call. See Contacts on page 32. For phone calls, an icon appears to the left of the name or number giving more information about the call:
X A call you made. W A call you received. V A missed call. Missed calls appear on the recent calls list only if you have Caller ID. 30 Note: The recent calls list also stores call alerts you have received. They appear as Private calls. Call alerts remain in your recent calls list until you delete them or until they reach the end of the list. To get more information on a recent call:
1 From the recent calls list, scroll to the call you want information on. 2 Press A under View. -or-
If View is not one of your options: Press m. Select View. This displays information such as the name associated with the call, the number, the date, time, and duration of the call. Storing Recent Calls to Contacts 1 From the recent calls list, scroll to the number you want to store. 2 Press A under Store. -or-
If Store is not one of your options: Press m. Select Store. Tip: If Store is not on this menu, the number is already stored in Contacts. 3 To store the number as a new entry, select [New Contact]. -or-
To store the number to an existing entry, select the entry. 4 With the Contacts type field highlighted, scroll left or right to display the Contacts type you want to assign to the number. For information on Contacts types, see page 32. 5 If you want to add more information to the entry, follow the applicable instructions in Creating Entries on page 34. 6 Press A under Done. Deleting Recent Calls To delete a call:
1 From the recent calls list, scroll to the call you want to delete. 2 Press m. 3 Select Delete. 4 Press A under Yes to confirm. To delete all calls:
1 From the recent calls list, press m. 2 Select Delete All. 3 Press A under Yes to confirm. DeletingRecentCalls 31 Contacts Contacts stores up to 600 numbers or addresses. Each Contacts entry can store several numbers or addresses. Information stored in Contacts is saved on your SIM card. A Contacts entry contains:
A name A name is required if you are storing more than one number or address to the entry;
otherwise, it is optional. Typically, this is the name of the person whose contact information is stored in the entry.
A ring tone You can assign a ring tone to each entry. This is the sound your phone makes when you receive phone calls or call alerts from any of the numbers stored in the entry.
A Contacts type Each number or address stored must be assigned a Contacts type:
A Mobile B Private C Work1 D Work2 E Home F Email G Fax H Pager T Talkgroup J IP K H Other Hub phone number Private ID phone number phone number phone number email address phone number phone number Talkgroup number IP address phone number Hub number
A number or address Each Contacts entry must contain a number or address. This may be any type of phone number, Private ID, Talkgroup number, Hub number, email address, or IP address. 32 Note: You can store numbers up to 64 digits long, but every 20 digits must be separated by a pause or wait. See Creating Pauses and Waits on page 37.
A Speed Dial number When you store a phone number, it is assigned a Speed Dial number. You can accept the default Speed Dial number or change it.
A voice name If you create a voice name for a number, you can then dial that number by saying the voice name into your phone. This icon appears P to the left of the Contacts type icon if a voice name is assigned. Note: This is an optional feature. Contact your service provider about its availability for purchase. Viewing Contacts To access Contacts:
Press A under Contcs. -or-
From the main menu, select Contacts. -or-
If you are on a call: Press m. Select Contacts. To view entries:
1 From the Contacts list, scroll to the entry you want to view. ViewingContacts 2 If an entry has more than one number or address stored, <> surrounds the Contacts type icon. Scroll left or right to view the icon for each number stored in the entry. 3 When the icon for the number or address you want to view is displayed, press A under View.
-or-
If View is not one of your options: Press m. Select View. 4 Scroll to view the other numbers and addresses stored for the entry. Tip: To view more entries, continue scrolling. Searching for a Name To search for a name in Contacts:
1 From the Contacts list, press m. 2 Select Search. 3 Enter the name you want to see. See Entering Text on page 55. 4 Press A under Ok. Your phone finds the name you entered or the nearest match. 33 Contacts Showing Only Private IDs and Groups To set Contacts to show only entries that contain Private IDs and entries for Talkgroups and Hubs:
1 From the Contacts list, press m. 2 Select Filter. 3 With Prvt/Grp/Hub highlighted, press A under Select. To set Contacts to show all entries:
1 From the Contacts list, press m. 2 Select Filter. 3 With Show All highlighted, press A under Select. Creating Entries A number or address and a Contacts type are required for all Contacts entries. Other information is optional. You may enter the information in any order by scrolling through the entry details. After you have entered the number or address, Contacts type, and any other information you want, you can press A under Done to save the entry to Contacts. To cancel a Contacts entry at any time press, e to return to the idle screen. 34 Tip: In some fields that require you to enter information, you can begin entering the information from the keypad instead of pressing A under Change. To create a Contacts entry:
1 To access the entry details screen:
Select Contacts > [New Contact]. -or-
From the Contacts list, press m. Scroll to New. Press A under Select. 2 If you want to assign a name to the entry:
With the Name field highlighted, press A under Change. Enter the name. See Entering Text on page 55. When you are finished, press A under Ok. 3 If you want to assign a ring tone to the name:
With the Ringer field highlighted, press A under Change. Scroll to the ring tone you want to assign. Press A under Select. 4 To assign a Contacts type to the number or address being stored:
With the Contacts type field highlighted, press A under Change. Scroll to the Contacts type you want to assign. Press A under Select. 5 To store a number or address:
With the # field highlighted (or ID for an email address, or IP for an IP address), press A under Change. Enter the number or address. For phone numbers, use the 10-digit format. For email addresses, see Entering Text on page 55. Tip: Press A under Browse to select a number or address from Contacts, the recent calls list, or Memo. When you are finished, press A under Ok. 6 If you want to assign more options to the number, press A under Change with the
[Options] field highlighted. See Assigning Options. 7 If you want to add more numbers or addresses to the entry:
Scroll past the information you already entered. Enter the additional information for the entry using step 2 through step 6. You must assign a name to the entry, if you have not already. 8 Press A under Done. CreatingEntries Assigning Options 1 If you have not already, press A under Change with the [Options] field highlighted. 2 The default Speed Dial number assigned to a phone number is displayed in the Speed # field. This is always the next available Speed Dial location. If you want to assign the phone number to a different Speed Dial location:
With the Speed # field highlighted, press A under Change. Press and hold A under Delete to delete the current Speed Dial number. Enter the new Speed Dial number using the keypad. When you are finished, press A under Ok. 3 If you want to create a voice name for a phone number, scroll to Voice Name and press A under Record. As directed by the screen prompts, say and repeat the name you want to assign to the number. Speak clearly into the microphone. 4 When you are finished, press A under Back. 35 Contacts Storing Numbers Faster To store numbers to Contacts from the recent calls list, see Storing Recent Calls to Contacts on page 30. To store numbers to Contacts from Memo, see Memo on page 50. To store numbers to Contacts from the idle screen:
1 Use the keypad to enter the number you want to store. 2 Press m. 3 Select Store Number. 4 To store the number as a new entry, select [New Contact]. -or-
To store the number to an existing entry, select the entry. 5 With the Contacts type field highlighted, scroll left or right to display the Contacts type you want to assign to the number. 6 If you want to add more information to the entry, follow the applicable instructions in Creating Entries on page 34. 7 Press A under Done. 36 Editing Entries 1 From the Contacts list, scroll to the entry you want to edit. 2 Press m. 3 Select Edit. The entry details screen displays. 4 Follow the applicable instructions in Creating Entries on page 34 to edit the various fields. Deleting Entries Delete an Entry 1 From the Contacts list, scroll to the entry you want to delete. 2 Press m. 3 To delete the entire entry, scroll to Delete Contact. 4 Press A under Select. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. Delete a Number or Address 1 From the Contacts list, scroll to the entry that contains the number or address you want to delete. 2 Scroll left or right to display the Contacts type for the number you want to delete. 3 Press m. 4 Scroll to Delete Number. 5 Press A under Select. 6 Press A under Yes to confirm. Note: If an entry contains only one number or address, deleting the number or address deletes the entry. Checking Capacity To see how many numbers are stored in Contacts:
1 From the Contacts list, press m. 2 Select Capacity. Creating Pauses and Waits When storing a number, you can program your phone to pause or wait between digits while dialing. A pause makes your phone pause for 3 seconds before dialing further. A wait makes your phone wait for your response before dialing further. This feature is useful when using voice mail or other automated phone systems that require you to dial a phone number and then enter an access number. To program a pause:
Press and hold * until the letter P appears. The P represents a 3-second pause. CheckingCapacity If you store 17035551235P1234, when you select this number and make a call, your phone dials the first 11 digits, pauses for 3 seconds, then dials the last 4 digits. If you want a pause longer than 3 seconds, press and hold * more than once. Each P represents a 3-second pause. To program a wait:
Press and hold * until the letter W appears. The W means your phone waits before dialing further. If you store 17035551235W1234, when you select this number and make a call, your phone dials the first 11 digits and then waits. A message appears asking if you want to send the rest of the digits. Press A under Yes to dial the last 4 digits. Tip: You can create pauses and waits while dialing a number from the keypad. See Creating Pauses and Waits While Dialing on page 44. International Numbers Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. 37 Contacts When storing a number that you plan to use for international calls, use Plus Dialing:
1 Press and hold 0 for two seconds. A 0 appears, then changes to a +. Note: The network translates the + into the appropriate international access code needed to place the call. 2 Enter the country code, city code or area code, and phone number. For information about making international calls, see Making International Calls on page 44. Accessing Contacts with GSM Phones If you plan to use the information stored in Contacts with an i2000, i2000plus, or any other GSM phone, download iDEN Phonebook Manager. Go to idenphones.motorola.com/iden/support for more information. You can use iDEN Phonebook Manager to make the Contacts information saved to your i325 phones SIM card accessible in this type of phone. 38 Call Forwarding Call forwarding sends calls to the phone numbers you specify. You can forward all calls to one number or forward missed calls to different numbers depending on the reason you missed the call. You can forward phone lines 1 and 2 independently. Forwarding All Calls When you set your phone to forward all calls, an icon appears in the top row of the display:
G Phone line 1 is active; calls to phone line 1 are being forwarded. H Phone line 1 is active; calls to phone line 2 are being forwarded. I Phone line 1 is active; calls to phone lines 1 and 2 are being forwarded. J Phone line 2 is active; calls to phone line 1 are being forwarded. K Phone line 2 is active; calls to phone line 2 are being forwarded. L Phone line 2 is active; calls to phone lines 1 and 2 are being forwarded. To forward all calls:
1 From the main menu, select Call Forward. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Select All Calls. 4 Scroll to To. 5 Press A under Change. 6 If you specified a forwarding number for all calls before, this number displays. To forward calls to this number, press A under Back. -or-
To delete this number, press A under Change, then press and hold A under Delete. To enter the number you want to forward calls to:
Enter the number using your keypad. -or-
Press A under Search. Select Contacts, Recent Calls, or Memo. Select the number you want to enter. 7 Press A under Ok. All your calls are now forwarded to the number you specified. Tip: In some fields, you can select an option by scrolling left or right instead of pressing A under Change. 39 CallForwarding Turning Off Call Forwarding If you dont want all your calls forwarded, turn the feature off:
1 From the main menu, select Call Forward. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Select All Calls. 4 Scroll to To. 5 Press A under Change. 6 Scroll to Off. 7 Press A under Select. All your calls are now sent to your phone. Calls you miss are forwarded according to the options set for missed calls. By default, missed calls are forwarded to voice mail. Forwarding Missed Calls You can specify a forwarding number for each type of missed call:
If Busy Your phone is on a call or transferring data. If No Answer You do not answer on the first 4 rings. If Unreachable Your phone is out of coverage or powered off. 40 Note: If you want a type of missed call sent to voice mail, the call forwarding number for that type of missed call must be your voice mail access number. To forward missed calls:
1 From the main menu, select Call Forward. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Select Detailed. 4 Scroll to If Busy to specify a forwarding number for calls received when your phone is busy. 5 Press A under Change. 6 If you specified a forwarding number for this type of call before, this number displays. To forward calls to this number, press A under Back and go to step 9. -or-
To delete this number, press A under Change, then press and hold A under Delete. 7 To enter the number you want to forward this type of call to:
Enter the number using your keypad. -or-
Press A under Search. Select Contacts, Recent Calls, or Memo. Select the number you want to enter. 8 Press A under Ok.
ViewingCallForwardingSettings 9 Repeat step 4 through step 8 for If No Answer and If Unreachable. When you are finished, press A under Back. Viewing Call Forwarding Settings 1 From the main menu, select Call Forward. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Select All Calls. 4 Scroll to To. 5 Press m. 6 Select Retrieve Status. 41 Additional Calling Options Call Waiting Call Waiting lets you receive a second call while on an active call. Call Waiting is always available, unless you turn it off for a specific call. If you are on a call and receive a second call, your phone emits a tone and displays a message saying you are receiving a second call. To accept the second call and put the active call on hold:
Press A under Yes. To accept the second call and end the active call:
1 Press e. Your phone rings with the second call. 2 Answer the second call. To decline the second call:
Press A under No. If you subscribe to voice mail, the call is forwarded to your voice mail box, unless you set Call Forward for If Busy to a different number. 42 Switching Between Calls When you accept a second call, the display shows the name or number of each call, with an icon indicating which call is active:
Y Phone call is active. Z Phone call is on hold. To make the call on hold active and put the active call on hold:
Press A under Switch. Turn Off Call Waiting To turn off Call Waiting during a call:
1 Press m. 2 Select In Call Setup > Call Waiting. 3 Press A under Change. 4 Scroll to Off. Tip: To turn Call Waiting back on while still on the call: Scroll to On. 5 Press A under Select. To turn off Call Waiting for the next call you make or receive:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone Calls > Call Waiting. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Scroll to Off. 4 Press A under Select. Call Waiting is turned back on when you end the call. Call Hold Call Hold lets you put an active call on hold and make a second call. To put a call on hold:
1 While on an active call, press m. 2 Scroll to Hold. 3 Press A under Select. 4 If you want to make the call active again, press A under Resum. To make a second call while a call is on hold:
1 Enter the number you want to call. Tip: To enter the number from Contacts: Press m. Select Contacts. 2 Press s to place the call. CallHold To end the second call and make the call on hold active again:
Press e. To make the call on hold active and put the active call on hold:
Press A under Switch. Making a 3-Way Call Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. 1 Place or receive a phone call. 2 While the call is active, press m. 3 Select 3 Way. This puts the call on hold. 4 Enter the second phone number you want to call. Tip: For quick ways to enter the number, press m. 5 Press s to place the call. 6 Press A under Join. All 3 people in the call can speak to and hear each other. 43 AdditionalCallingOptions Creating Pauses and Waits While Dialing You can enter a pause or wait while dialing a number. For more information on pauses and waits, see Creating Pauses and Waits on page 37. To create a pause while dialing a phone number:
1 From the keypad, enter the digits you want to occur before the pause. 2 Press m. 3 Select Insert Pause. 4 Enter the digits you want to occur after the pause. To create a wait while dialing a phone number:
1 From the keypad, enter the digits you want to occur before the wait. 2 Press m. 3 Select Insert Wait. 4 Enter the digits you want to occur after the wait. 44 Making International Calls Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. Plus Dialing lets you place an international call to most countries without entering the local international access code. 1 Press and hold 0 for two seconds. A 0 appears, then changes to a +. Note: The network translates the + into the appropriate international access code needed to place the call. 2 Enter the country code, city code or area code, and phone number. Setting One Touch PTT One Touch PTT sets your phone to call the most recent Private ID or Hub on the recent calls list, or a Private ID or Hub you choose, every time you press the PTT button. To set your phone to call the most recent Private ID on the recent calls list:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > 2-Way Radio > One Touch PTT. 2 Scroll to Last Call. 3 Press A under Select. To set your phone to call a Private ID you choose:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > 2-Way Radio > One Touch PTT > Assigned Number. 2 To enter the Private ID you want your phone to call every time you press the PTT button:
Enter the number using your keypad. -or-
Press A under Search. Select Contacts, Recent Calls, or Memo. Select the number you want to enter. Tip: If you are entering a Talkgroup number, enter # before the number. 3 Press A under Ok. To turn off One Touch PTT:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > 2-Way Radio > One Touch PTT. 2 Scroll to Off. 3 Press A under Select. Group Calls Note: This section describes how group calls work on phones without Advance Features. If your have Advanced Features, see Group Calls, Talkgroups, and Hubs on page 67 for a a description of how group calls work on your phone. GroupCalls A group call is similar to a Private call, but is made to all members of a Talkgroup at once. A Talkgroup is a predetermined group of your service providers customers. Before you can make or receive group calls, a Talkgroup must be established. After the Talkgroup is established, you must join the Talkgroup. Joining a Talkgroup Your sales representative or your service provider establishes Talkgroups for you and assigns each Talkgroup a Talkgroup number. You can choose a name for each of your Talkgroups when you create entries for them in Contacts. To receive group calls made to a Talkgroup, you must join the Talkgroup. You can belong to only one Talkgroup at a time. When you join a new Talkgroup, you no longer belong to your previous Talkgroup. To join a Talkgroup:
1 Press #. Then enter the Talkgroup number using the keypad. -or-
Choose the Talkgroup name from Contacts or the recent calls list. 2 Press A under Join. 45 AdditionalCallingOptions Making Group Calls 1 Press #. Then enter the Talkgroup number using the keypad. -or-
Choose the Talkgroup name from Contacts or recent calls list. 2 Proceed as if making a Private call. Receiving Group Calls To answer a group call:
Proceed as if answering a Private call. Only one person at a time may speak on a group call. The Private ID or name of the person who is speaking will appear on the display below the Talkgroup number. Turning off Group Calls To control whether you hear group calls to your Talkgroup:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > 2-Way Radio > Tkgrp Silent. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Scroll to On if you dont want to hear group calls to your Talkgroup. -or-
Scroll to Off if you want to hear group calls to your Talkgroup. 4 Press A under Select. 46 Call Timers Call timers measure the duration of your phone calls, Private or group calls, and optionally circuit data use, as well as the number of Kilobytes sent and received by your phone:
Last Call displays the duration of your most recent phone call.
Phone Reset keeps a running total of your phone call minutes, until you reset it.
Phone Lifetime displays the total minutes of all your phone calls.
Prvt/Grp Reset keeps a running total of all of your Private and group call minutes, until you reset it.
Prvt/Grp Lifetime displays the total minutes of all your Private and group calls.
Circuit Reset keeps a running total of all of your circuit data use, until you reset it.
Circuit Lifetime displays the total minutes of all of your circuit data use.
Kbytes Reset keeps a running total of the number of Kilobytes sent and received by your phone, until you reset it. To view or reset a timer:
1 From the main menu, select Call Timers. 2 Select the feature you want to view or reset. 3 To view a feature without resetting: Press A under Done when you are finished viewing.
-or-
To reset a feature: Press A under Reset. Press A under Yes to confirm. Note: The values displayed by Call Timers should not be used for billing. Call timers are estimates only. Using Your Phone as a Modem Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. To use your phone as a modem with a laptop, handheld device, or desktop computer:
1 Open the connector cover. connector cover UsingYourPhoneasaModem 2 With the phones display facing up, insert a data cables connector into the accessory connector, until you hear a click. 3 Insert the data plug into the COM port of the other device. When used as a modem, your phone has these data transfer modes:
Circuit data used for sending and receiving faxes and for transferring large files
Packet data used for small file transfers such as email To use these services, you must install the iDEN Wireless Data Services software (available separately). For more information on setting up your computer and your i325 phone for packet and circuit data calls, refer to the WirelessData ServicesUsersGuideor contact your service provider. Note: Please remember to reinsert the connector cover after a data session. 47 AdditionalCallingOptions Making TTY Calls Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. To use your phone to make phone calls using a teletypewriter (TTY) device:
1 Connect one end of a 2.5mm cable into the audio jack on your phone. Connect the other end of the cable to your TTY device. 2 Make sure that your phones TTY feature is on and select the TTY mode you want to use. 3 Use your phone to enter phone numbers and make calls. When you make a TTY call, these icons appear on the phones display:
N Phone call is active. O Phone call is on hold. TTY device features such as Turbo-Code, High-Speed, and Interruption are not supported by your phone. These features must be turned off or disabled to use your TTY device with your phone. 48 Turning On the TTY Feature Your phones TTY feature must be on if you want to make TTY calls, set the TTY mode, or change the TTY baud rate. To make sure the TTY feature is on:
From the main menu, select Settings > Phone Calls > TTY. This field must say On. Choosing a Mode Your phone supports these TTY modes:
TTY You type and read text on your TTY device.
VCO (Voice-Carry-Over) You speak into your phone and read text replies on your TTY device.
HCO (Hearing-Carry-Over) You type text on your TTY device and listen to voice replies on your phone speaker. To change mode while not in a call:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone Calls > TTY > Type. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Scroll to the TTY mode you want. 4 Press A under Select. When you make a TTY call, the call begins in the TTY mode you last selected. To change mode during a call using your phone:
1 Press m. 2 Select In Call Setup > TTY > Type. 3 Select the mode you want. To change mode during a call using your TTY device, issue one of the following commands:
VCO please to select VCO mode HCO please to select HCO mode HCO off please to turn off HCO mode Important: When you are using HCO, the sound coming from your phone speaker may be uncomfortably loud. Use caution when putting the phone to your ear.
(For information on setting the volume of your phone speaker, see Setting the Volume on page 90.) Changing the TTY Baud Rate By default, your phones TTY baud rate is set to 45.45, the baud rate required for TTY calls within the U.S. To make calls outside the U.S., set your TTY baud rate to 50.0. To change the TTY baud rate:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone Calls > TTY > Baud. MakingTTYCalls 2 Press A under Change 3 Scroll to the baud rate for your location. 4 Press A under Select. 49
To store the memo number to Contacts:
1 From the main menu, select Memo. 2 Press m. 3 Press A under Select. 4 To store the number as a new entry, select [New Contact]. -or-
To store the number to an existing entry, select the entry. 5 With the Contacts type field highlighted, scroll left or right to display the Contacts type you want to assign to the number. 6 If you want to add more information to the entry, follow the applicable instructions in Creating Entries on page 34. 7 Press A under Done. Memo Memo lets you store a number, make a call to that number, and save it to Contacts. To create a memo:
1 From the main menu, select Memo. 2 Enter the number using your keypad. 3 Press A under Store. To view the memo later:
1 From the main menu, select Memo. To delete the memo:
1 From the main menu, select Memo. 2 Press and hold A under Delete. 3 Press A under Store. To edit the memo:
1 From the main menu, select Memo. 2 Enter the new number. 3 Press A under Store. To make a call to the memo number:
1 From the main menu, select Memo. 2 To make a phone call, press s. -or-
To make a Private call, press the PTT button. 50 Ring Tones To set the ring tone your phone makes when you receive phone calls, message notifications, or call alerts:
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones. 2 Make sure VibeAll or is SilentAll set to Off. 3 Scroll through the list of ring tones and select the one you want to assign. Vibrate sets your phone to vibrate instead of making a sound; Silent sets your phone to neither vibrate nor make a sound. Tip: Highlighting a ring tone lets you hear it. 4 Press A under Assign. 5 Scroll to the feature you want to assign the ring tone to. 6 Press A under Select. Tip: A checkmark next to a feature means the current ring tone has been assigned to it. To remove the assignment: Scroll to the feature. Press A under Select. 7 To assign the ring tone to other features, repeat step 5 through step 6. 8 When you are finished, press A under Done. Setting Your Phone to Vibrate If your phone includes a vibrate feature, you can set your phone to vibrate when you receive phone calls, Private calls and group calls, messages notifications, or call alerts. Note: This is an optional feature. Contact your service provider about its availability for purchase. Turning Ring Tones Off You can set your phone to make no sound when you receive phone calls, Private calls and group calls, messages notifications, or call alerts. These icons indicate how the ringer is set. v The phone always vibrates instead of making a sound. R The phone vibrates instead of making a sound for phone calls. M The phone never vibrates nor makes a sound; or, the phone neither vibrates nor makes a sound for phone calls. u Prvt/Grp speaker set to off. These icons may appear at the same time. 51 RingTones Never Ring 1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones >
SilentAll. 2 Scroll left or right to set SilentAll to On. Always Vibrate Instead of Ringing If your phone includes a vibrate feature:
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones >
VibeAll. 2 Scroll left or right to set VibeAll to On. Tip: Pressing the volume controls to turn down the volume as far as possible sets VibeAll to On. Do Not Ring for Some Features To set individual ring options for phone calls, messages notifications, or call alerts:
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones. 2 Make sure VibeAll or SilentAll is set to Off. 3 Scroll through the list of ring tones to Silent. -or-
If your phone includes the vibrate feature, scroll through the list of ring tones to Vibrate. 4 Press A under Assign. 5 Scroll to the feature you want to set to make no sound. 52 6 Press A under Select. 7 To assign Vibrate or Silent to another feature, repeat step 5 through step 6. 8 When you are finished, press A under Done. Note: To set ring options for Private calls and group calls, see Setting Your Phone to Not Ring on page 90. Ring and Vibrate To set your phone to ring and vibrate when you receive phone calls or call alerts:
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones. 2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off. 3 Scroll through the list of ring tones and select the one you want to assign. 4 Press m. 5 Select Assign w/Vibe. 6 Select the feature you want to set to ring and vibrate. 7 When you are finished, press A under Done. This icon S appears on the display. Assigning Ring Tones to Contacts You can set the ring tone your phone makes when you receive phone calls or call alerts from someone you have stored in Contacts. 1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones. 2 Make sure VibeAll or SilentAll is set to Off. 3 Scroll through the list of ring tones to the one you want to assign. Highlighting a ring tone lets you hear it. 4 Press A under Assign. 5 Select A Contact. 6 Scroll to the Contacts entry you want to assign the ring tone to. 7 Press A under Select. Viewing Ring Tone Assignments 1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones. 2 Make sure VibeAll or SilentAll is set to Off. 3 Highlight any ring tone. 4 Press m. 5 Select Overview. AssigningRingTonestoContacts 6 Scroll to view ring tones assigned to features and Contact entries. Downloading More Ring Tones Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. If you want to use other ring tones, you can download them into your phone for a fee. Go to www.motorola.com/idenupdate for a selection of custom ring tones and downloading instructions. Note: Ring tones may be downloaded only once. If you delete a ring tone from your phone, you must purchase it to download it again. Managing Memory To view the amount of memory available for custom ring tones:
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones. 2 Make sure VibeAll or SilentAll is set to Off. 3 Highlight any ring tone. 4 Press m. 5 Select Memory Usage. Deleting custom ring tones frees memory. 53 RingTones Note: Ring tones are stored in your phone using the same memory space used to store voice records. Deleting voice records frees memory space for ring tones. Deleting Custom Ring Tones To delete a custom ring tone:
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones. 2 Make sure VibeAll or SilentAll is set to Off. 3 Scroll to the ring tone you want to delete. 4 Press m. 5 Select Delete. 6 Press A under Yes to confirm. 54 Entering Text You can enter text into your phone using the traditional method of pressing a key several times for each character, or by pressing a key once for each letter while words likely to be the one you want are chosen from a database. You can also enter symbols and numbers into a text field. In screens that require you to enter text, you see the following icons near the top right corner. These icons tell you which text input mode you are using:
l Alpha Press a key several times for each character. j Word Press a key once for each letter while words likely to be the one you want are chosen from a database. i Symbols Enter punctuation and other symbols. k Numeric Enter numbers. When you access a screen that requires you to enter text, you start in Alpha mode. To choose a text input mode:
1 At a screen that requires you to enter text, press m. 2 A checkmark appears next to the current text input mode. Scroll to the text input mode you want to use. 3 Press A under Select. Using Alpha Mode
Press any key on the keypad to enter the letters, numbers, and symbols on that key. For example, to enter the letter Y, press 9 three times.
Type a letter then scroll up to make that letter uppercase, or type a letter then scroll down to make that letter lowercase.
See Special Function Keys on page 56 for more information on adding spaces, capitalization, and punctuation. Using Word Mode In Word mode, T9 Text Input analyzes the letters on the keypad button you press and arranges them to create words. As you type, T9 Text Input matches your keystrokes to words in its database and displays the most commonly used matching word. You can add you own words to this database. Entering a Word 1 Select Word as your text input mode. 55 EnteringText 2 Type a word by pressing one key for each letter. For example, to type test press 8 3 7 8. The displayed word may change as you type it. Do not try to correct the word as you go. Type to the end of the word before editing. 3 If the word that appears is not the desired word, press 0 to change the word on the display to the next most likely word in the database. Repeat until the desired word appears. If the desired word does not appear, you can add it to the database. Adding Words to the Database 1 Select Alpha as your text input mode. 2 Type the word using Alpha mode. 3 Select Word as your text input mode. 4 Press #. The word you typed in Alpha text entry mode is now in the database. Note: You cannot store alphanumeric combinations, such as Y2K. 56 Choosing a Language To change the language of the database:
1 At a screen that requires you to enter text, press m. 2 Select Languages. 3 Scroll to the language you want for your database. 4 Press A under Select. Special Function Keys Some of the phones keys assume different functions while in Alpha or Word mode. Spaces Press # for a space. Capitalization When you press and hold #, it acts as a 3-way toggle. Press and hold # to make the next letter typed uppercase (shift), to make all subsequent letters typed uppercase (caps lock), or to go back to lowercase letters. UsingNumericMode Using Symbols Mode 1 Select Symbols as your text input mode. A row of symbols appears along the bottom of your phones display. Scroll right to view the complete row. 2 Scroll left or right to choose the symbol you want to enter. 3 Press A under Select. These icons appear in the top row of your display:
m Shift is on. n Caps lock is on. When neither of these icons appear, letters typed are lowercase. Note: Your phone automatically makes the first letter of a sentence uppercase. Punctuation Press 1 or 0 to insert punctuation. Continue to press the key to view the list of symbols available through that key. Pause to select the symbol you want. Note: Additional punctuation symbols are available in Symbols mode. Using Numeric Mode 1 Select Numeric as your text input mode. 2 Press the number buttons on your keypad to enter numbers. 57 Messages You can receive the following types of messages on your phone:
Voice mail messages
Short Message Service (SMS) text messages
Depending on your service provider, you may have the option to receive fax mail and Net alerts. You have 2 ways to access the messages you receive:
Respond to the message notification that appears when the message is received.
Dismiss the message notification and access the message later through the message center. You can listen to or view these messages, delete them, or continue to store them in the message center. Message Notifications When you receive a message, your phone notifies you with text on the display and a notification tone or vibration. You can access the message or dismiss the notification. 58 If you dismiss the notification, the message is not deleted. It can be accessed through the message center. If you are not on a phone call when you receive a message, your phone sounds a notification tone every 30 seconds until you access the message, dismiss the notification, or the alert time-out expires. Setting Notification Options To control whether your phone sounds message notification tones while you are on phone calls:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone Calls > Notifications. 2 Choose the option you want:
Receive All Tones sound during calls for all types of messages.
Msg Mail Only Tones sound during calls for SMS messages; tones for all other types of messages are held until you end calls.
Delay All Tones for all types of messages are held until you end calls. 3 Press A under Select. Tip: To set notification options during a call:
Press m. Select In Call Setup >
Notifications. Message Center The message center manages your messages. All your messages are stored in the message center. The message center shows how many messages you have of each type. To access your messages through the message center:
1 From the main menu, select Messages. 2 Scroll to the type of message you want to access. 3 Press A under the display option on the left. MessageCenter 59 Sending Unanswered Calls to Voice Mail To send a phone call to voice mail instead of answering it:
Press e. -or-
Press A under No. If the caller leaves a message, this icon y appears on the display, reminding you that you have a new message. Voice Mail Messages Note: To receive voice mail messages, you must first set up a voice mail account with your service provider. Receiving a Message When you receive a voice mail message, New Voice Mail Message appears on the display. To call your service providers voice mail system and listen to the message:
Press A under Call. To dismiss the message notification:
Press A under Back. This icon y appears on the display, reminding you that you have a new message. Accessing Voice Mail from the Message Center 1 From the main menu, select Messages > Voice Mail. 2 Press A under Call to call your service providers voice mail system. 60 MOSMS Messages Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. Enter the phone number of your service center. If you do not know this number, contact your service provider. When you are finished, press A under Ok. If your service provider offers MOSMS, your phone sends SMS messages using MOSMS and receives SMS messages from other phones that are using MOSMS. Setting Up Before you begin using MOSMS, you may need to set up your signature, service center number, and expiration information:
1 From the main menu, select Messages. 2 Scroll to Text Inbox. 3 Press m. 4 Select Text Msg Setup. 5 With the Signature field highlighted, press A under Change. Enter your signature. It may be up to 11 characters long. See Entering Text on page 55. When you are finished, press A under Ok. 6 With the Srvc Cntr No field highlighted, press A under Change. 7 With the Expire After field highlighted, press A under Change. This is the amount of time messages you send are saved if they cannot be delivered. After this period, they are discarded. Scroll or press A under Q to change field. When you are finished, press A under Done. 8 Press A under Back to save the information you entered. Receiving a Message When you receive a text message, New Text Message appears on the display. To view the message:
1 Press A under Read. 2 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll to read it. 3 To keep the message, scroll to the end of the message and press A under Save. -or-
61 MOSMSMessages To delete the message, scroll to the end of the message and press A under Delete. To dismiss the message notification:
Press A under Exit. This icon w appears on the display, reminding you that you have a new message. If your phone is powered off when you receive a text message, your phone notifies you the next time you power it on. If you are out of your coverage area, your phone alerts you when you return to your coverage area. Tip: While reading a text and numeric message that contains a phone number, you can press s to call that number. Reading from the Message Center 1 From the main menu, select Message > Text Inbox. 2 Scroll to the message you want to read. 3 Press A under Read. 4 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll to read it. 5 To keep the message, press A under Save.
-or-
62 To delete the message, scroll to the end of the message and press A under Delete. Tip: To see more choices, including replying to the message, press m. Creating and Sending Messages 1 From the main menu, select Messages > Text Inbox > [Create Msg]. -or-
From the main menu, select Messages > Text Outbox > [Create Msg]. 2 Press A under Create. 3 To address the message:
Use the keypad to enter the phone number of the person you want to send the message to.
-or-
Press A under Browse. Select Contacts, Recent Calls, or Memo. Enter the number from Contacts, the recent calls list, or Memo, as you would when making a call. When you are finished, press A under Ok. 4 Enter the text of the message. See Entering Text on page 55. -or-
To use a quick note: Press A under Browse. Scroll to the quick note you want. Press A under Select. For more information on quick notes, see Using Quick Notes on page 64. If you want to add your signature: Press m. Select Add Signature. When you are finished, press A under Ok. 5 If you want to send the message, press A under Yes. -or-
If you want to request confirmation of delivery, specify the type of message you want to send, save the message as a draft, or delete the message without sending it, press A under No. 6 If you want to request confirmation of delivery:
With the Report field highlighted, press A under Change. Select Yes. 7 If you want to specify the type of message you want to send:
With the Send As field highlighted, press A under Change. Scroll to the message type you want. Press A under Select. 8 To send the message: Press s. Press A under Yes. -or-
To save the message as a draft without sending it: Press m. Scroll to Save As Draft. Press A under Select. -or-
CreatingandSendingMessages To delete the message without sending it: Press m. Scroll to Delete. Press A under Select. Tip: In some fields, you can select an option by scrolling left or right instead of pressing A under Change. Beginning Messages From the Recent Calls List 1 From the recent calls list, scroll to the name you want to send a message to. 2 If the entry has more than one phone number stored, view the phone number you want to send the message to. 3 Press m. 4 Select Compose SMS. The message is automatically addressed to the phone number you chose. 5 Follow step 4 through step 8 of Creating and Sending Messages on page 62. Beginning Messages From the Idle Screen 1 Using the keypad, enter the number you want to send a message to. 2 Press m. 63 MOSMSMessages 3 Select Compose SMS. The message is automatically addressed to the phone number you chose. 4 Follow step 4 through step 8 of Creating and Sending Messages on page 62. Using Quick Notes Quick notes are short, pre-written text messages that you can create, edit, and send. You can store up to 20 quick notes. A quick note may be up to 30 characters long. To create a quick note:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Quick Notes > [New Quick Note]. 2 Press A under Create. Enter text. See Entering Text on page 55. -or-
To choose from pre-installed notes: Press A under Browse. Scroll to the note you want. Press A under Select. 3 Press A under Store. Tip: For more options, including sending the quick note, press m. 64 Using Drafts When you save a message as a draft, it is saved in the drafts folder. You must have a draft saved to have a drafts folder. To edit a draft:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Drafts Folder. 2 Press A under Change. 3 To edit the fields you want to change, follow step 3 through step 8 in Creating and Sending Messages on page 62. If you have a draft saved, you can create more drafts in the drafts folder:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Drafts Folder > [Create Msg]. 2 Press A under Create. 3 Follow step 3 through step 7 in Creating and Sending Messages on page 62. 4 Scroll to Save As Draft. Using the Outbox Messages you have sent are stored in the outbox. These icons appear next to messages in the outbox:
5 Sent and confirmed. 9 Send attempted. 0 Forwarded. 4 Received by addressee. 6 Not received by addressee. 8 Send failed. 7 Re-sent. Locked. R Resending Messages To resend a message:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Text Outbox. 2 Scroll to the message you want to resend. 3 Press m. 4 Select Re-send. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. CreatingandSendingMessages Deleting Sent Messages To delete a sent message:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Text Outbox. 2 Scroll to the message you want to delete. 3 Press m. 4 Select Delete. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. To delete all unlocked sent messages:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Text Outbox. 2 Press m. 3 Select Delete All. 4 Press A under Yes to confirm. Locking Sent Messages When you lock a message, it cannot be deleted until you unlock it. 1 From the main menu, select Messages > Text Outbox. 2 Scroll to the message you want to lock or unlock. 3 Press m. 4 Scroll to Lock to lock the message. -or-
65 MOSMSMessages Scroll to Unlock to unlock the message. 5 Press A under Select. Managing Memory Your text inbox, outbox, and drafts folder have a set amount of memory available for storing messages. The text inbox holds 20 messages. If the text inbox is full, you cannot receive messages until you delete some. The outbox and drafts folder share memory space. Together they can hold 30 messages. If the outbox and drafts folder memory is full, you cannot send messages or save drafts until you delete some. To view the amount of memory available in your text inbox:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Text Inbox. 2 Press m. 3 Select Memory Meter. To view the amount of memory available in your outbox and drafts folder:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Text Outbox. 2 Press m. 3 Select Memory Meter. 66 Advanced Features Note: These features may not be offered by your service provider. Group Calls, Talkgroups, and Hubs A group call is similar to a Private call, but is made to all members of a Talkgroup at once. A Talkgroup is a predetermined group of your service providers customers. A Hub consists of 1 to 4 Talkgroups. You can make and receive calls on one of these Talkgroups, called the primary Talkgroup. You can set your phone to receive calls, but not make calls, to the other Talkgroups. You must join a Talkgroup to make or receive calls on that Talkgroup. On your i325 phone, you join a Talkgroup by joining the Hub it belongs to. On your i325 phone, all group calls you make are Hub calls. Group calls you receive are Hub calls or Talkgroup calls to Talkgroups in the Hub you have joined. Your sales representative or your service provider establishes Talkgroups and Hubs for you. You can choose a name for each when you create entries for them in Contacts. Joining a Hub To make and receive group calls, you must join a Hub. When you join a Hub, you can make or receive group calls only with Talkgroups in that Hub. You can only belong to one Hub at time. To join a Hub:
1 Press #. Enter the Hub number using the keypad. -or-
Scroll to the Hub name in Contacts or recent calls list. 2 Press A under Join. Talkgroups Not in Hubs If you have a Talkgroup saved to Contacts that is not in a Hub, you cannot join that Talkgroup from Contacts or the recent calls list unless you create a Hub for it in Contacts. To create a Hub for a Talkgroup:
1 Begin creating a new Contacts entry. See Creating Entries on page 34. 67 AdvancedFeatures 2 Assign the Hub Contacts type to the entry. 3 Assign the Talkgroup number as the number of the Hub. This creates a Hub with the same number as the Talkgroup it contains. You cannot add any more Talkgroups to this Hub. You can also join a Talkgroup that is not in a Hub by pressing # and then entering the Talkgroup number using the keypad. Your phone treats this as if you had joined a Hub containing only that Talkgroup. Viewing Hub Details While you belong to a Hub, you can see which Talkgroups are in it. 1 From the recent calls list, scroll to the Hub. 2 Press m. 3 Select Details. The primary Talkgroup is shown first, after the Hub number. Tip: You can also view this information while in a Hub call: Press m. Select Details. 68 Making Group Calls You make calls using the primary Talkgroup in a Hub. 1 Press #. Enter the Hub number using the keypad. -or-
Scroll to the Hub name in Contacts or recent calls list. 2 Proceed as if making a Private call. Receiving Group Calls To answer a group call:
Proceed as if answering a Private call. Only one person at a time may speak on a group call. When you receive a group call, the following appears on the screen:
The name of the Hub
The name or number of the primary Talkgroup in the Hub
The Private number of the person speaking You can set your phone to receive group calls from all the Talkgroups in a Hub or only from the primary Talkgroup. See Setting Talkgroup Scan on page 69. Setting Talkgroup Scan To set your phone to receive group calls from all the Talkgroups in a Hub:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > 2-Way Radio > Scan. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Scroll to On. 4 Press A under Select. To set your phone to receive group calls only from the primary Talkgroup in a Hub:
Scroll to Off in step 3. Tip: You can also set this option from Contacts, from the recent calls list, or after you begin entering a number using the keypad: Press m. Select Call Setup > Scan. Turning off Group Calls To control whether you hear group calls:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > 2-Way Radio > Tkgrp Silent. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Scroll to On if you dont want to hear group calls.
-or-
Scroll to Off if you want to hear group calls. Note: Setting Tkgrp Silent to On prevents you from hearing Emergency Group calls. EmergencyGroupCalls Emergency Group Calls An Emergency Group call is a Hub call that takes priority over all other phone activities in the phone making the call and sounds a special emergency tone in the phones receiving the call. When you make an Emergency Group call, a group call is made using a designated emergency Hub or the Hub you currently belong to. A designated emergency Hub must be created for you by your service provider and is stored on your SIM card. If no designated emergency Hub has been created for you, Emergency Group calls you make are made using the Hub you currently belong to. If no designated emergency Hub has been created for you and you have not joined a Hub, you cannot make Emergency Group calls. Making an Emergency Group Call Important: Making an Emergency Group call ends all other activity on your phone, including 911 emergency calls. Unlike other group calls, pressing the PTT button does not start an Emergency Group call. Pressing T starts the call. Pressing the PTT button lets you begin talking. 69 AdvancedFeatures To make an Emergency Group call:
1 Press and hold T for 3 seconds to start the Emergency Group call. 2 Press and hold the PTT button on the side of your phone to talk. Begin talking after your phone emits a chirping sound. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. To end an Emergency Group call:
Press and hold T for 3 seconds. An Emergency Group call automatically ends if there is no activity for 30 seconds. Emergency Group calls you make do not appear in the recent calls list. Receiving an Emergency Group Call When receive an Emergency Group call, your phone sounds a special emergency tone, unless your phone is set to make no sounds. To answer an Emergency Group call:
Proceed as if answering a Private call. Emergency Group calls you receive do not appear in the recent calls list. 70 Isolated Operation Isolated Operation lets you continue to make and receive group calls on the Hub you last used, within a limited coverage area, even if you lose network coverage. When you lose network coverage during a phone call, Private call, group call, or data transfer, the call or data transfer ends. But you can make and receive new group calls on the Hub you last used. If the One Touch PTT settings on your phone would prevent you from making group calls on the Hub you last used, these setting are overridden while your phone is in Isolated Operation. Important: You cannot make Emergency Group calls in Isolated Operation, even if the Hub you last used is the designated emergency Hub. You must have network coverage to make Emergency Group calls. If the designated emergency Hub is the Hub you last used when you lost network coverage, your phone treats the Hub you used before the designated emergency Hub as the Hub you last used. Call Alert Status Messages You can send call alerts that include text messages up to 10 characters long. These messages are stored on your SIM card when your receive your phone. There are 10 you can choose from. If the phone you send the call alert to has this capability, the text message appears on that phone when the call alert is received. If the phone you send the call alert to does not this capability, the call alert appears without the text message. Sending a Call Alert Status Message 1 Proceed as you would when sending any call alert. 2 When the Ready to Alert screen appears, choose the text message you want to send:
Scroll left or right to display the message you want to send. -or-
Press A under Select to view all messages and select the one you want to send. -or-
Press the number on you key pad associated with the message you want to send. Press 1 and then 0 to choose message 10. 3 Press the PTT button until Alert Successful appears on the display. CallAlertStatusMessages Receiving a Call Alert Status Message When you receive a call alert that includes a text message, the text message appears as the part of of the call alert information when you receive the call alert and in the recent calls list. 71 Java Applications Your phone arrives with Java applications loaded and ready to install. You can download and install more Java applications. Note: Using Java applications may cause your phone to use up more battery power than other uses of your phone. Installing Applications 1 From the main menu, select Java Apps. 2 Scroll to the application or suite of applications you want to install. 3 Press A under Install. Installation messages appear as the application installs. 4 If you want to create a shortcut to the Java application on the main menu: Press A under Next. Press A under Yes. Press A under Add. 5 Press A under Done. 72 Running Applications To run an application that has a shortcut on the main menu:
1 From the main menu, select the application or suite of applications you want to run. 2 If you have selected a suite of applications, select the application you want to run. To run an application that does not have a shortcut on the main menu:
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps. 2 Scroll to the application or suite of applications you want to run and press A under Run. 3 If you have selected a suite of applications, scroll to the application you want to run and press A under Run. Tip: If you dont hear the sounds associated with the Java application, select Settings >
Volume and check the volumes of Java Speaker and Java Earpiece. Suspending Applications When you suspend an application, it does not stop running. It goes to the background so that you can run another application in the foreground. To suspend an application:
Press e. To view your suspended applications:
From the Java menu, scroll to Suspended Apps and press A under Open. You can have up to 3 applications running at one time 1 running in the foreground and 2 in the background. Resuming Applications You can resume a suspended application at any time. This brings it to the foreground. 1 From the Java menu, scroll to Suspended Apps and press A under Open. 2 Scroll to the application you want to resume and press A under Open. Ending Applications To end an application:
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps. 2 If the application you want to end is part of a suite of applications, select the suite. 3 Scroll to the application you want to end. 4 Press m. 5 Select End. Tip: You can also end applications from the Suspended Apps screen. ResumingApplications To end all applications:
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps. 2 Scroll to Suspended Apps. 3 Press m. 4 Select End All. 5 Press A under Yes. 6 If you want to end all applications without letting them exit, press A under EndNow. Downloading Applications If you want to run more Java applications, you can download them into your phone. Go to www.motorola.com/idenupdate for a selection of Java applications and downloading instructions. Deleting Applications To delete an application:
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps. 2 Scroll to the application you want to delete. 3 Press m. 4 Select Deinstall. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. 73 JavaApplications 6 When your phone has finished deleting the application, press A under Done. To delete all Java applications:
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps. 2 Scroll to Java System. 3 Press m. 4 Select Delete All. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. Managing Memory To view the amount of memory available for Java applications:
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps > Java System. 2 Press A under Next. 3 To see more memory information, press A under Next again. Deleting Java applications frees memory. Note: Java application data is stored in your phone using the same memory used to store voice records, and ring tones. Deleting some of these other items frees memory for Java applications. 74 Shortcuts on the Main Menu When you install an application, you can create a shortcut to the application on the main menu. To create a shortcut to an application that is already installed:
1 From the main menu, select Settings >
Personalize > Menu Options > Add/Remove Apps. -or-
From the main menu: Press m. Select Main Menu Setup > Add/Remove Apps. 2 Scroll to view the list of Java applications. Any application that has a shortcut on the main menu has a checkmark next to it. 3 Scroll to the application you want to create a shortcut for. 4 Press A under Add. 5 Press A under Done. To remove a shortcut:
1 From the main menu, select Settings >
Personalize > Menu Options > Add/Remove Apps. -or-
From the main menu: Press m. Select Main Menu Setup > Add/Remove Apps. 2 Scroll to view the list of Java applications. Any application that has a shortcut on the main menu has a checkmark next to it. 3 Scroll to the application you want to remove the shortcut for. 4 Press A under Remve. 5 Press A under Done. Java Applications and GPS Enabled Some Java applications can make use of your phones GPS feature to determine the approximate geographical location of your phone. (See GPS Enabled on page 78 for more information on the GPS feature.) However, for privacy reasons, you may not always want Java applications to access the location of your phone. Your phone protects your privacy by giving you the option to block all or some Java applications from accessing the location of your phone. Setting Privacy for All Java Applications These options control the privacy of all Java applications on your phone:
JavaApplicationsandGPSEnabled
Restricted No Java or similar software applications may access the location of your phone. However, location information may still be available to the phones owner, fleet manager, or account administrator.
Unrestricted All Java applications may access the location of your phone, without notifying you.
By Permission When a Java application attempts to access the location of your phone, you are prompted to give permission. However, location information may still be available to the phones owner, fleet manager, or account administrator. See Setting Privacy Options on page 83 for information on choosing these options. Granting or Denying Permission If you choose By Permission, you must grant or deny each Java application access to the location of your phone when the application requests access for the first time. You may be required to grant or deny subsequent requests from the same application, depending on the privacy setting you choose for the individual Java application (see Setting Privacy for Each Java Application on page 76). 75 JavaApplications When a Java application requests access to the location of your phone, a screen appears informing you. To deny this request:
1 Press A under Deny. The application does not access the location of your phone. 2 Select the denying option you want:
Always If the application requests access to the location of your phone again, the request is denied without notifying you.
For this session If the application requests access to the location of your phone again before you power off your phone, the request is denied without notifying you.
Only Once If the application requests access to the location of your phone again, you are prompted to grant or deny permission. To grant this request:
1 Press A under Grant. The application accesses your phones location. 2 Select the granting option you want:
Always If the application requests access to the location of your phone again, the request is granted without notifying you. 76
For this session If the application requests access to the location of your phone again before you power off your phone, the request is granted without notifying you.
Only Once If the application requests access to the location of your phone again, you are prompted to grant or deny permission. Setting Privacy for Each Java Application After a given Java application requests access to the location of your phone for the first time, you have the opportunity to set the GPS privacy option for that Java application. 1 From the main menu, select Java Apps. 2 Scroll to the application or suite of applications you want to set the privacy option for. If the application has requested access to the location of your phone,S appears when you highlight the application. 3 Press m. 4 Select Privacy Settings. 5 Scroll to Location and press A under Change. 6 Select the privacy option you want for this application:
JavaApplicationsandGPSEnabled
Always The application always has permission to access the location of your phone, without notifying you.
Ask When the application requests access to the location of your phone, you are prompted to grant or deny permission (see Granting or Denying Permission on page 75).
Never When the application requests access to the location of your phone, the request is denied without notifying you. 77 GPS Enabled Your phones GPS Enabled feature uses information from Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites orbiting the Earth to determine the approximate geographical location of your phone, expressed as latitude and longitude. The availability and accuracy of this location information (and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) will vary depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are often difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in other situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. SEE:
IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind. When you make a 911 emergency call, the GPS feature of your phone can help emergency personnel locate you if your phone has adequate access to GPS satellite signals and your emergency response center is equipped to process such information. You can also use the GPS feature to view your approximate location. Location information appears on the phones display. If your phone is connected to a laptop computer or similar device, software running on that device can request your location. To protect your privacy, you can control whether these requests are granted. 78 IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind If you are using the GPS feature of your phone while driving, please give full attention to driving and to the road. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because your GPS antenna cannot establish a view of a wide area of open sky), the GPS feature of your phone WILL NOT WORK. Such situations include but are not limited to:
In underground locations Inside of buildings, trains, or other covered vehicles
Under any other metal or concrete roof or structure
Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover
Near a powerful radio or television tower
When your GPS antenna is covered (for example, by your hand or other object) or facing the ground In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your phone
Walking or driving very slowly may also substantially reduce GPS performance. Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take much longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any 911 call, always report the location to the emergency response center if you can and if you cannot, remain on your phone for as long as the emergency response center instructs you. Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature will only provide an approximate location, often within 150 feet (45 meters) but sometimes much further from your actual location. Advice on how to improve GPS performance is provided in Enhancing GPS Performance on page 81. While the GPS feature of your phone can be a valuable navigational aid, it does not replace the need for careful navigating and good judgment. Never rely solely on one device for navigation. Remember that the accuracy of the location information and the time needed to obtain it will vary depending on circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from adequate numbers of satellites. MakinganEmergencyCall On emergency calls, your phone uses assistance information from the phone network to improve the speed and accuracy of your phones location calculation: if such assistance information becomes unavailable, it may reduce the speed and accuracy of the location calculation. The satellites used by the GPS feature of your phone are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature of your phone. Making an Emergency Call Dial 911 to be connected to an emergency response center. If you are on an active call, you must end it before calling 911. When you make an emergency 911 call, the GPS feature of your phone begins to seek information to calculate your approximate location. It will take the GPS feature of your phone some time to determine your approximate location. Even where your phone has good access to sufficient GPS satellite signals and network assist data, it may take 30 seconds or more to determine the approximate location. This time will increase where 79 GPSEnabled there is reduced access to satellite signals. When your approximate location is determined, it is made available to the appropriate emergency response center. In some cases, your local 911 emergency response center may not be equipped to receive GPS location information. For this reason, and because the GPS location information reported is only approximate or may not be available in your location (see IMPORTANT:
Things to Keep in Mind on page 78), always report your location to the 911 operator you speak to when making an emergency call, if able, just as you would when using a phone without GPS capabilities. Note: If you are concerned about whether your local 911 emergency response center is equipped to receive GPS location information, contact your local authorities. In general, if your phone has access to signals from more GPS satellites, your location will be determined faster and more accurately than if your phone has access to signals from fewer GPS satellites. 80 If your phone does not have adequate access to GPS satellites signals, the location of the nearest cell tower in contact with your phone is automatically made available to the emergency response center, if the center has the capability to receive such information. See Enhancing GPS Performance on page 81 for information on how to help your phone determine your location. Viewing Your Approximate Location 1 From the main menu, select GPS > Position. 2 Scroll to view the entire screen. This displays the following information about the last time your location was calculated:
The time (as Greenwich Mean Time) and date that the location was last calculated.
The approximate location, expressed as latitude and longitude.
The estimated accuracy of the calculated location. This estimate of accuracy is only a very rough estimate and may vary substantially from the actual accuracy of the approximate location information reported.
The number of satellites used to calculate the location. In general, more satellites make for better accuracy. To calculate your location again:
Press A under Rfrsh. It may take your phone several minutes to complete the process of determining your location. During this time, a message usually appears on your phones display saying your phone is scanning for satellites. For tips on getting the best location calculation, see Enhancing GPS Performance. The Position screen displays the updated information. To cancel a location calculation before it is completed:
Press A under Cancel to return to the Position screen. -or-
Press e to return to the idle screen. Each time approximate location of your phone is calculated, the latest location information is stored in your phone and remains there even when your phone is powered off. You will see this information the next time you view the Position screen. EnhancingGPSPerformance If you received a phone call or alert while attempting to determine your location, the Position screen will disappear, but your phone will continue attempting to determine its location. If it is successful, the new location information will be displayed the next time you view the Position screen. Enhancing GPS Performance Sometimes the GPS feature of your phone may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. If this happens when you are making an emergency call, the location of the nearest cell tower in contact with your phone is made available to the appropriate emergency response center if the center has the capability to receive such information. If this happens when you are trying to view your location on the phones display, you will see a message indicating that your phone cannot access satellites. 81 GPSEnabled To improve accuracy and increase your chances of a successful calculation, do the following while your phone is determining your approximate location:
Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your phone and a large amount of open sky. If possible, go outside, away from tall buildings and foliage. While performance in a building is improved by moving closer to windows, glass with certain sun shielding films may block satellite signals.
Hold your phone to enhance reception. Signals from GPS satellites are transmitted to your GPS antenna, which is inside the back of your phone, opposite the earpiece, above the label with your service providers name on it. Hold your phone away from your body, giving the antenna clear access to satellite signals. Do not cover the antenna area with your fingers or anything else. 82 GPS antenna area
Stand still. If possible, stand still until your phone is finished determining your location. Moving your phone at a walking pace while your phone is calculating your approximate location may substantially decrease GPS performance. In a car. When using the GPS Enabled feature in a car, position your phone so that the GPS antenna has good access to GPS signals through the cars windows. Typically, the GPS antenna has best access to GPS signals in a car when placed near a window. Note: Although moving your phone at a walking pace decreases GPS performance, moving it at the speed of a moving car does not.
Stay in network coverage. Depending on who your service provider is, the network will provide your phone with information that helps determine your location more quickly and accurately. Updating Satellite Almanac Data Another way to keep the GPS feature of your phone working well is to keep your satellite almanac data up to date. The United States government maintains an almanac of data about where GPS satellites are as they orbit the Earth. This information is available to your phone. Keeping your satellite almanac up to date helps your phone determine your location more quickly. The almanac contains information about the location of satellites, their operational status, and other satellite information. Keeping this information updated enhances the performance of your GPS feature. In most cases, your phone will be able to get a fix in strong satellite signal conditions with outdated almanac data, but it may take longer. Note: When you make an emergency call, your phone does not rely upon the almanac to determine your location. UpdatingSatelliteAlmanacData If your satellite almanac data is out of date, your phone may prompt you to update it. Follow the instructions that appear on the phones display. You may be asked to go to a web site or call a customer care number. Setting Privacy Options Your phones GPS privacy options control whether software applications may view the location of your phone.You may set your phone to one of these GPS privacy options:
Restricted No software applications may view the location of your phone. However, location information may still be available to the phones owner, fleet manager, or account administrator.
Unrestricted All applications may view the location of your phone, without notifying you.
By Permission When an application attempts to view the location of your phone, you will be prompted to give permission. However, location information may still be available to the phones owner, fleet manager, or account administrator. Note: Privacy options do not apply to the transmission of location information during emergency 911 calls. 83 GPSEnabled To set your GPS privacy options:
1 From the main menu, select GPS > Privacy. 2 If your GPS PIN security feature is enabled, enter your GPS PIN. (See Setting the GPS PIN Security Feature for more information.) 3 Scroll to the privacy setting you want. 4 Press A under Select. Setting the GPS PIN Security Feature To prevent your GPS privacy settings from being altered without your knowledge, your GPS privacy option can be protected by a PIN. When you receive your phone, the GPS security feature is turned off, so you do not have to enter a GPS PIN to access your GPS privacy options. If you turn this feature on, you will be required to enter a GPS PIN to access your GPS privacy options. To turn the GPS Enabled security feature on or off:
1 From the main menu, select Settings >
Security > GPS PIN. 2 Scroll to On or Off. 3 Press A under Select. 4 Enter the current GPS PIN. Note: When you receive your phone, your GPS PIN is 0000. 84 5 Press A under Ok. To change your GPS PIN:
1 From the main menu, select Settings >
Security > Change Password > GPS PIN. 2 Enter the current GPS PIN. Note: When you receive your phone, your GPS PIN is 0000. 3 Press A under Ok. 4 Enter the new 4- to 8-digit GPS PIN. 5 Press A under Ok. 6 Enter the new 4- to 8-digit GPS PIN to confirm. 7 Press A under Ok. Using GPS with Map Software You can use the GPS feature of your phone to provide approximate location data to a laptop computer or similar device that is running interactive map software such as that made by DeLorme or Microsoft. This way, if your phone has good access to GPS signals, your approximate position on a map can be made available as you travel in a vehicle. To do this, connect your phone to your laptop (or other device) with a data cable and set your phone to transmit data (see Getting Started on page 85). Your phone then provides your approximate UsingGPSwithMapSoftware Getting Started To connect your phone to your laptop or other device:
1 Open the connector cover. connector cover 2 With the phones display facing up, insert the data cables connector into the accessory connector, until you hear a click. location to the device running the map software, which displays your location on a map. Your phone provides an updated location every second and the map software displays your changing location on its map. See Enhancing GPS Performance on page 81 for more details on obtaining good location information. Note: Because your phone is continuously determining your location, using the GPS feature of your phone with map software uses the phones battery power quickly. Software Compatibility Your phone sends location information to your laptop or other device using the standard National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) format. Your phone supports output messages in NMEA-0183 format and supports the following NMEA-0183 sentences: GGA, GLL, GSA, GSV, RMC, and VTG. The map software running on your laptop or other device must support NMEA 3.0. 85 To set your phone to send location information to your laptop or other device:
1 From the main menu, select GPS > Interface. 2 With NMEA OUT highlighted, press A under Change. 3 Scroll to On. 4 Press A under Select. Your phone is now sending location data to your laptop or other device. To stop your phone from sending location data to your laptop or other device:
Set NMEA OUT to Off. Each time you power your phone on, NMEA OUT is automatically set to Off. GPSEnabled 3 Insert the data plug into the COM port of your laptop or other device. Make sure no other application is using the COM port selected. Make sure the COM port settings of your laptop or other device are set to the following:
Bits per second: 4800
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: Hardware 86 Voice Records Note: This is an optional feature. Contact your service provider about its availability for purchase. A voice record is a recording you make with your phone and can play back. You can record notes to yourself or phone calls. Your phone can store up to 20 voice records. Creating Voice Records To record a note to yourself:
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord. 2 With [New VoiceRec] highlighted, press A under Record. 3 Say the message you want to record into the microphone. Tip: To stop recording before you are finished, press m, then select Pause. To start recording again, press A under Resume. To stop recording and discard the voice record at any time, press A under Cancel. 4 When you are finished recording, press A under Stop. To add to the end of voice record:
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord. 2 Scroll to the voice record you want to add to. 3 Press m. 4 Select Add To. 5 When you are finished recording, press A under Stop. To record a phone call:
1 While on an active call, press m. 2 Select Record. 3 When you are finished recording, press A under Stop. Note: Recording of phone calls is subject to applicable laws regarding privacy and recording of phone conversations. Playing Voice Records 1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord. 2 Scroll to the voice record you want to play. 3 Press A under Play. 4 To stop the voice record while it is playing, press A under Back. Tip: To fast forward, scroll right. To rewind, scroll left. To pause or resume, press any number key. 87 VoiceRecords Labeling Voice Records When you create a voice record, it is labeled with the time and date it was recorded. You can then rename it with a custom label. 1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord. 2 Scroll to the voice record you want to label. 3 Press m. Select Label. 4 Enter the label you want to assign. See Entering Text on page 55. 5 Press A under Ok. Deleting Voice Records To delete a voice record:
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord. 2 Scroll to the unlocked voice record you want to delete. 3 Press m. 4 Select Delete. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. To delete all voice records:
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord. 2 Scroll to any voice record. 3 Press m. 4 Select Delete All. 88 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. Locking Voice Records When you lock a message, it cannot be deleted until you unlock it. 1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord. 2 Scroll to the message you want to lock or unlock. 3 Press m. 4 Scroll to Lock to lock the message. -or-
Scroll to Unlock to unlock the message. When a voice record is locked, this icon l appears next to it. Managing Memory To view the amount of memory available for voice records:
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord. 2 With [New VoiceRec] highlighted, press m. Select Memory. -or-
With any voice record highlighted, press m. Select Memory. To free more memory by deleting all unlocked voice records:
1 From the voice records memory screen, press A under Delete. 2 Press A under Yes to confirm. Note: Voice records are stored in your phone using the same memory space used to store messages, Java application data, and ring tones. Deleting some of these other items frees memory for voice records. ManagingMemory 89 Customizing Your Phone Setting the Volume To set the volume of the sound coming from the phones earpiece or speaker:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Volume. 2 Scroll to Earpiece to set the earpiece volume.
-or-
Scroll to Speaker to set the speaker volume. 3 Press A under Change. 4 To select the volume:
Scroll left or right. -or-
Press the volume controls. 5 Press A under Ok. To set the volume of the phones ring:
Press the volume controls. For another way to set the volume of the phones ring, or the volume of many other sounds your phone makes:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Volume. 2 Scroll to the option you want and make the change. Choose Line 1 or Line 2 to set the 90 volume of the phones ring when you get a call on that line. See Volume Features on page 92. Setting Your Phone to Not Ring To set your phone to make no sound when you receive phone calls, Private calls, group calls, message notifications, and call alerts, see Setting Your Phone to Vibrate on page 51. To set your phone to vibrate instead of making a sound when you receive Private calls and group calls, even if you want your phone to ring for other features:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > 2-Way Radio > Alert Type. Tip: If Alert Type does not appear: From the main menu, select Ring Tones. Make sure VibeAll or SilentAll is set to Off. Repeat step 1. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Scroll to Vibrate. 4 Press A under Select. Note: This is an optional feature. Contact your service provider about its availability for purchase. If your phone does not include a vibrate feature, you can still set your phone to make no sound. Scroll to Silent in step 3. Seeing the Display Better To set the contrast of the display:
1 From the main menu, select Settings >
Display/Info > Contrast. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Scroll left or right to set the contrast. 4 Press A under Ok. Using Settings Settings contains many submenus that let you customize your phone. Display/Info Features The Display/Info menu controls how the keypad and display appear:
Palette changes the color scheme of the display.
Backlight controls how long the backlight stays on after you make or receive a call. SeeingtheDisplayBetter
Clock controls whether the time and date appears on the idle screen, sets the format of the time and date, and sets the year.
Contrast sets the contrast on the display. See Seeing the Display Better.
Language sets the language that your phone displays. Phone Calls Features The Phone Calls menu controls how your phone handles phone calls:
Set Line sets phone line 1 or phone line 2 as the active line for outgoing calls.
Any Key Ans If this feature is on, you can answer calls by pressing any number key on the keypad.
Auto Redial sets your phone to automatically redial calls you make when the system is busy.
Call Waiting See Call Waiting on page 42.
Auto Ans sets your phone to automatically answer an incoming call after a specified number of rings. When this feature is on, the phone answers by connecting you to the caller;
it does not send the call to voice mail, unless you are out of coverage or on the line.
Minute Beep causes a beep to sound every minute of an active call. 91 CustomizingYourPhone
Call Duration causes the duration of a call to appear on the phones display when the call ends.
TTY lets you use your phone with a TTY device. See Making TTY Calls on page 48.
Notifications See Message Notifications on page 58. 2-Way Radio Features The 2-Way Radio menu controls how your phone handles Private calls and group calls:
Scan controls whether your phone receives Group calls from all the Talkgroups in a Hub. See Setting Talkgroup Scan on page 69. Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider.
Tkgrp Silent controls whether you hear group calls to your Talkgroup or Hub. See Turning off Group Calls on page 69.
Tkgrp Area lets you define your Talkgroup or Hub area.
One Touch PTT See Setting One Touch PTT on page 44. 92
Alert Type controls how your phone notifies you when you receive Private calls and group calls. See Setting Your Phone to Not Ring on page 90. Personalize Features The Personalize menu makes main menu items easier to access.
Menu Options Reorder Menu lets you change the order of the items on the main menu by grabbing and moving them; Add/Remove Apps lets you create a shortcut to a Java application on the main menu.
Left Sftkey sets the main menu item you access when you press the left option key from the idle screen.
Right Sftkey sets the main menu item you access when you press the right option key from the idle screen.
Power Up sets the main menu item you see when you power on your phone. Volume Features The Volume menu sets the volume of sounds your phone makes:
Line 1 sets ring volume for phone line 1.
Line 2 sets ring volume for phone line 2.
Messages sets the volume of message notifications.
Earpiece sets the volume of sound coming out of the earpiece.
Speaker sets the volume of sound coming out of the speaker.
Keypad sets the volume of sound associated with pressing keys and buttons.
Java Earpiece sets the volume of sound associated with Java applications coming out of the earpiece.
Java Speaker sets the volume of sound associated with Java applications coming out of the speaker.
Data sets the volume of sounds that notify you that you are receiving a circuit data call. Security Features The Security menu lets you turn security features on and off and change passwords:
Phone Lock turns on a feature that locks your phone, either immediately or automatically after a set period of inactivity. An unlock code is required to enable this feature, to unlock the phone, and to set a new unlock code. Contact your service provider for your default unlock code. UsingSettings
Keypad Lock locks the phones keypad, either immediately or automatically after a set period of inactivity. See Locking the Keypad on page 15 for more information on locking and unlocking the keypad.
SIM PIN enables and disables your phones SIM PIN security feature. See Turning the PIN Requirement On and Off on page 13.
GPS PIN enables and disables your phones GPS PIN security feature. See Setting the GPS PIN Security Feature on page 84.
Change Passwords changes your phone unlock code, security code, SIM PIN, and GPS PIN. Advanced Features The Advanced menu contains advanced and rarely used Settings features.
Alert Timeout controls the amount of time a tone continues to sound when you receive a message notification or call alert.
Headset/Spker sets headset option. See Using a Headset on page 102. 93 CustomizingYourPhone
Connectivity Network ID sets the phones network IDs and their roaming options under the direction of your service provider; Master Reset lets your service provider reset your service in the event of a security or provisioning problem.
Reset Defaults Reset Settings returns all settings to their original defaults; Reset All returns all settings to their original defaults and erases all stored lists. Use only under the direction of your service provider.
Return to Home controls how long the recent calls list displays after calls.
Phone Only prevents your phone from making or receiving Private calls or group calls. Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider.
Baud Rate sets the baud rate at which your phone communicates with a laptop computer, PC, or similar device. 94 Profiles A profile is a group of settings saved together so that you can apply them to your phone easily. A profile contains these settings:
Ring Tones sets all options described in Ring Tones on page 51, except assigning ring tones to Contacts.
Display/Info sets Color Palette and Backlight options. See Display/Info Features on page 91.
Phone Calls sets Set Line and Auto Ans options. See Phone Calls Features on page 91.
Volume sets all options described in Volume Features on page 92.
Call Filter controls which calls, call alerts, and message notifications your phone responds to. See Setting Call Filtering on page 98.
Advanced sets headset option. See Using a Headset on page 102. Your phone arrives with pre-set profiles. You can also create your own profiles. Viewing Profiles To view the profiles stored in your phone:
1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Scroll to the profile you want to view. Tip: The profile that is currently in effect on your phone has a checkmark next to it. 3 Press m. 4 Select View. 5 Scroll to view settings. Switching Profiles To apply a profile to your phone:
1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Scroll to the profile you want to apply. 3 Press A under Select. The profile you selected is now in effect. 95 Profiles Surveillance Profile During Surveillance profile the following features will be disabled:
screen backlight keypad backlight speaker audio ringtones all vibration This setting is designed for public safety use with an earbud or headset only. Note: Earbuds and headsets are sold separately. See Accessories on page 16. How Changing Settings Affects Profiles Many of the settings contained in profiles can be set without switching or editing profiles for example, by selecting Settings or Ring Tones to set options, or by setting the volume of the phones ring using the volume controls. When you do this, your phone either:
Updates the profile in effect to reflect these changes, without notifying you -or-
96
Creates a temporary profile that contains these changes Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. To set your phone to create a temporary profile that contains changes you make to settings:
1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Press m. 3 Select Setup > Temp Profile. 4 Press A under Change. 5 Set this option to On. To set your phone to update the profile in effect to reflect any changes you make to settings:
Set Temp Profile to Off in step 5. Note: You cannot change any of the settings in the Surveillance profile. If your service provider does not offer the Temp Profile option, your phone always updates the profile in effect to reflect the changes you make to settings.
Temporary Profiles If your phone is set to create temporary profiles, a temporary profile is created when you make changes to settings without switching or editing profiles. A temporary profile is based on the profile in effect when you made the changes, but reflects the changed settings. Making more changes further updates the temporary profile, for as long as it is in effect. A temporary profile stays in effect until you switch profiles, power off your phone, or delete it (or the profile it is based on) from the list of profiles. If you do not store a temporary profile, it is deleted when you switch profiles or power off your phone. A temporary profile is automatically given the same name as the profile it is based on, but with an asterisk (*) in front of it. When you view a temporary profiles settings, the options that differ from the profile it is based on have an asterisk in front of them. Storing a Temporary Profile To store a temporary profile as a new profile:
1 From the main menu, select Profiles. TemporaryProfiles 2 Scroll to the temporary profile. 3 Press m. 4 Select Store As New. 5 Enter the name you want to give the profile. See Entering Text on page 55. When you are finished, press A under OK. To overwrite the profile the temporary profile is based on:
1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Scroll to the temporary profile. 3 Press m. 4 Select Store Changes. The temporary profile is stored with the name of the profile it is based on. The profile it is based on, as it existed before you made changes to settings, is gone. Creating Profiles 1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Select [New Profile]. -or-
Scroll to any profile. Press m. Select New. 3 Enter the name you want to give the profile. See Entering Text on page 55. 97 Profiles Tip: You can begin entering text from the keypad instead of pressing A under Change. When you are finished, press A under OK. 4 If you want to base this profile on an existing profile: With Copy From highlighted, press A under Change. Select the profile you want to base this profile on. If you do not choose a profile to copy from, the new profile is based on a default profile. 5 Press A under Create. 6 Scroll through the list of options and set their values. 7 Press A under Done. Editing Profiles 1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Scroll to the profile you want to edit. 3 Press m. 4 Select Edit. 5 Scroll through the list of options and set their values. Note: You cannot edit the Surveillance profile. 98 Deleting Profiles To delete a profile:
1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Select the profile you want to delete. Note: A temporary profile is automatically deleted when the profile it is based on is deleted. 3 Press m. 4 Select Delete. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. To delete all profiles:
1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Press m. 3 Select Delete All. 4 Press A under Yes to confirm. Setting Call Filtering The call filtering setting in each profile lets you control which calls, call alerts, and message notifications your phone notifies you of, and which it ignores. To set call filtering:
1 While setting options for a profile, select Call Filter. 2 To set filtering options for phone calls, scroll to Phone and press A under Change.
Off sets your phone to notify you of all phone calls.
All sets your phone to ignore all phone calls.
All Contacts sets your phone to notify you only of phone calls from numbers stored in Contacts.
Some Cntcs sets your phone to notify you only of phone calls from numbers you select from Contacts. 3 If you set the Phone option to Some Cntcs, select up to 5 Contacts entries that contain phone numbers you want to be notified of calls from. When you are finished, press A under Done. 4 To set filtering options for Private calls and group calls, scroll to Prvt/Grp and press A under Change.
Off sets your phone to notify you of all Private calls and group calls.
On sets your phone to ignore all Private calls and group calls. SettingCallFiltering 5 To set filtering options for call alerts, scroll to Alerts and press A under Change.
Off sets your phone to notify you of all call alerts.
On sets your phone to ignore all call alerts. 6 To set filtering options for message notifications, scroll to Notifications and press A under Change.
Off sets your phone to notify you of all messages.
Voice Messages sets your phone not to sound a tone or vibrate when you receive voice messages.
Text Messages sets your phone not to sound a tone or vibrate when you receive text messages.
All sets your phone not to sound a tone or vibrate when you receive any message. Note: When you receive a type of message you have set not to sound a tone or vibrate, the message notification screen appears as usual. 7 Press A under Done. 99 Shortcuts Shortcuts lets you access most menu options by pressing a number on your keypad (1 through 9) or saying the voice name of the shortcut. You create the shortcut and then use it to take you to that screen any time. Creating a Shortcut Note: When you receive your phone, all number keys may already be assigned to shortcuts. If this is the case, you can create new shortcuts by deleting or replacing existing shortcuts. 1 Go to the menu item you want to create a shortcut for. For example, if you want to create a shortcut to the screen for creating a new Contacts entry:
From the main menu, select Contacts, then highlight [New Contact]. 2 Press and hold m until a confirmation screen appears. 3 Press A under Yes. 4 With key highlighted, press A under Change. 5 Press the number key you want to assign to the shortcut. 100 6 Press A under Ok. 7 If you want to record a voice name for the shortcut: With Voice highlighted, press A under Record. As directed by the screen prompts, say and repeat the name you want to assign to the number. Speak clearly into the microphone. Note: This is an optional feature. Contact your service provider about its availability for purchase. 8 Press A under Done. 9 If the number key you chose is already assigned to a shortcut, a prompt appears asking if you want to replace the existing shortcut. Press A under Yes to replace the existing shortcut. -or-
Press A under No if you want to keep the existing shortcut and assign another number key to the shortcut. Using a Shortcut If you know the shortcut number:
1 From the idle screen, press m. 2 On your keypad, press the number assigned to the shortcut. If you do not know the shortcut number:
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts. 2 Scroll to the shortcut you want to use. -or-
If you assigned a voice name to the shortcut:
Select Voice Recog from the main menu. As directed by the screen prompt, say the name of the shortcut into the microphone. The name of the shortcut will be repeated back to you and the shortcut with that voice name will be highlighted. Note: This is an optional feature. Contact your service provider about its availability for purchase. 3 Press A under Go to. Editing a Shortcut To change the number assigned to a shortcut:
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts. 2 With any shortcut highlighted, press m. 3 Select Reorder. 4 Scroll to the shortcut you want to move. 5 Press A under Grab. 6 Scroll to the place where you want the shortcut to appear. 7 Press A under Insert. EditingaShortcut 8 Repeat step 4 through step 7 for all the items you want to move. 9 Press A under Done. To change the number or voice name assigned to a shortcut:
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts. 2 Highlight any shortcut. 3 Press m. Select Edit. 4 With Key or Voice highlighted, press A under the display option on the left to change assignments. Deleting Shortcuts To delete a shortcut:
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts. 2 Scroll to the shortcut you want to delete. 3 Press m. 4 Select Delete. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. To delete all shortcuts:
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts. 2 With any shortcut highlighted, press m. 3 Select Delete All. 4 Press A under Yes to confirm. 101 Using a Remote PTT Button If you are using a headset or other accessory with a remote PTT button, you can use the remote PTT button for phone calls and Private calls. For phone calls, use the remote PTT button to answer calls, switch between calls, and end calls. Hold the remote PTT button for less than 2 seconds to answer calls and switch between calls. Hold the remote PTT button for more than 2 seconds to end calls. For Private calls, use the remote PTT button as you would the PTT button on your phone. Using a Headset If you use a headset or similar device with your phone, you can set your phone to send incoming sound to the headset only, or to the headset and the speaker at the same time:
1 From the main menu, select Settings >
Advanced > Headset/Spkr. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Scroll to HdsetOnly to send incoming sound to the headset only. -or-
Select Hdset&Spkr to send incoming sound to the headset and ring tones to the speaker. 4 Press A under Select. Note: When using a headset, the PTT button on your phone works the same way as when you are not using a headset. Sounds associated with Private calls and group calls are heard through the headset. Attaching a Headset 1 Lift the audio jack cover. 2 Insert the headset connector firmly into the audio jack. You may have to rotate the headset connector until it fits securely into the audio jack. 102 Status Messages Message Description Understanding Status Messages You may receive status messages under certain conditions. Before contacting Customer Care, note the message, numeric code, and the conditions under which it appeared. The following table lists and describes the status messages. Status Messages Message Description The number that you entered is not valid. Number Not in Service User Not Available The phone that you called is either busy, out of coverage, or turned off. Please try again later. The person that you called has not purchased this service. User Not Authorized System Busy Please Try Again Self Check Error +
Number Code Self Check Fail +
Number Code PIN Blocked Call Your Provider Please Try Later This service is temporarily not available. Please try again later. Service Restricted This service was restricted by your service provider, or this service was not purchased. You are either out of coverage or having problems with provisioning. Service Not Available Insert SIM Check SIM Card Wrong PIN The system is experiencing heavy traffic. Please try again later. An error occurred. Please try again. A fault was detected with your phone. If this error recurs, note the error code and contact Customer Care. An operational fault was detected with your phone. Note the numeric code, turn your phone off, and contact Customer Care. The incorrect PIN was entered 3 consecutive times. You will be unable to place or receive calls on your phone. Contact Customer Care to have them obtain the PIN Unblocking Key (PUK) code. Your SIM card is not being detected. Please check to ensure that you have inserted the SIM card correctly into your phone. Please check your SIM card to make sure it has been inserted properly. You have entered an incorrect PIN number. 103 UnderstandingStatusMessages Status Messages Message Description Enter SIM PIN Please enter your 4 to 8-digit SIM PIN code. Enter Unlock Code Auto Phone Lock is activated. Enter you unlock code. Warns of low memory for Net Alerts. Searching for GPS satellites. Could not find GPS satellites. A problem occurred in your phones GPS circuitry. If this error occurs, contact Customer Care. New Browser Message Memory Full!
Scanning for Satellites Unable to Locate Sats Technical Error 104 Safety and General Information IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT OPERATION. READ THIS INFORMATION BEFORE USING YOUR INTEGRATED MULTI-SERVICE PORTABLE RADIO. RF Operational Characteristics Your radio product contains a radio frequency transmitter to convey the information you wish to send as well as occasional automatic signals used to sustain connection to the wireless network, and a receiver which enables you to receive communication and connection information from the network. Portable Radio Product Operation and EME Exposure Your Motorola radio product is designed to comply with the following national and international standards and guidelines regarding exposure of human beings to radio frequency electromagnetic energy (EME):
United States Federal Communications Commission, Code of Federal Regulations; 47 CFR part 2 sub-part J.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) /
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE). C95. 1-1992. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE). C95. 1-1999 Edition. International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 1998.
Ministry of Health (Canada). Safety Code 6. Limits of Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields in the Frequency Range from 3 kHz to 300 GHz, 1999.
Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications (Electromagnetic Radiation - Human Exposure) Standard 2003.
ANATEL, Brasil Regulatory Authority, Resolution 256 (April 11, 2001) additional requirements for SMR, cellular and PCS product certification. To assure optimal radio product performance and make sure human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy is within the guidelines set forth in the above standards, always adhere to the following procedures:
105
SafetyandGeneralInformation Phone Operation When placing or receiving a phone call, hold your radio product as you would a wireline telephone. Speak directly into the microphone. Two-way radio operation When using your radio product as a traditional two-way radio, hold the radio product in a vertical position with the microphone one to two inches (2.5 to 5 cm) away from the lips. Body-worn operation To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, if you wear a radio product on your body when transmitting, always place the radio product in a Motorola approved clip, holder, holster, case or body harness for this product. Use of non-Motorola-approved accessories may exceed FCC RF exposure guidelines. If you do not use a Motorola approved body-worn accessory and are not using the radio product in the intended use positions along side the head in the phone mode or in front of the face in the two-way radio mode, then ensure the antenna and the radio product are kept the following minimum distances from the body when transmitting 106
Phone or Two-way radio mode: one inch (2.5 cm)
Data operation using any data feature with or without an accessory cable: one inch (2.5 cm) Antenna Care Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the radio product and may violate FCC regulations. DO NOT hold the antenna when the radio product is IN USE. Holding the antenna affects call quality and may cause the radio product to operate at a higher power level than needed. Approved Accessories For a list of approved Motorola accessories call 1-800-453-0920, or visit our website at www.motorola.com/iden. PortableRadioProductOperationandEMEExposure ALL MODELS WITH FCC ID AZ489FT5830 MEET THE GOVERNMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radiofrequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg.1 Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions reviewed by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that is does not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this model phone when tested for use at the ear is 1.06 W/kg and when tested on the body, as described in this user guide, is 1.09 W/kg during packet data transmission. (Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and FCC requirements.)2 While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement for safe exposure. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID AZ489FT5830. Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA) web-site at http://www.wow-com.com. 1 In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. 2 The SAR information reported to the FCC includes the FCC-accepted Motorola testing protocol, assessment procedure, and measurement uncertainty range for this product. 107 SafetyandGeneralInformation Electro Magnetic Interference/Compatibility Note: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed or otherwise configured for electromagnetic compatibility. Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conflicts, turn off your radio product in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Aircraft When instructed to do so, turn off your radio product when on board an aircraft. Any use of a radio product must be in accordance with applicable regulations per airline crew instructions. 108 Medical Devices Pacemakers The Advanced Medical Technology Association
(AdvaMed) recommends that a minimum separation of 6 inches (15 cm) be maintained between a handheld wireless radio product and a pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with those of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Persons with pacemakers should:
ALWAYS keep the radio product more than 6 inches (15 cm) from their pacemaker when the radio product is turned ON.
Not carry the radio product in a breast pocket.
Use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference.
Turn the radio product OFF immediately if you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. Hearing Aids Some digital wireless radio products may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Operational Warnings Use While Driving Check the laws and regulations on the use of radio products in the area where you drive. Always obey them. When using the radio product while driving, please:
Give full attention to driving and to the road.
Use hands-free operation, if available.
Pull off the road and park before making or
!!
answering a call if driving conditions so require. For Vehicles with an Air Bag Do not place a portable radio product in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a portable radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio product may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. OperationalWarnings Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off your radio product prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, unless it is a radio product type especially qualified for use in such areas as Intrinsically Safe (for example, Factory Mutual, CSA, or UL approved). Do not remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Note: The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres referred to above include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such as grain, dust or metal powders, and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often but not always posted. Blasting Caps and Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio product when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. 109 3 Shake excess liquid from radio product. 4 Place the radio product and battery in an area that is at room temperature and has good air flow. 5 Let the radio product, battery, and SIM card dry for 72 hours before reconnecting the battery and/or powering on the radio product. If the radio product does not work after following the steps listed above, contact your dealer for servicing information. Clean the external surfaces of the radio product with a damp cloth, using a mild solution of dishwashing detergent and water. Some household cleaners may contain chemicals that could seriously damage the radio product. Avoid the use of any petroleum-based solvent cleaners. Also, avoid applying liquids directly on the radio product. SafetyandGeneralInformation
!
Operational Cautions Batteries All batteries can cause property damage and/or bodily injury, such as burns if a conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains touches exposed terminals. The conductive material may complete an electrical circuit (short circuit) and become quite hot. Exercise care in handling any charged battery, particularly when placing it inside a pocket, purse, or other container with metal objects. To reduce the risk of injury, batteries should not be exposed to fire, disassembled, or crushed. Cleaning and Drying Considerations Using a leather carry case may help protect the surfaces and help prevent liquids (e.g., rain) from entering into the interior of the radio product. This product is not water proof, and exposing the unit to liquids may result in permanent damage to the unit. If your radio product interior gets wet, then do not try to accelerate drying with the use of an oven or a dryer as this will damage the radio product and void the warranty. Instead, do the following:
1 Immediately power off the radio product. 2 Remove Battery and SIM card (if so equipped) from radio product. 110 Intrinsically Safe Radio Information The Intrinsically Safe Approval unit refers to a product that has been approved as intrinsically safe by an approval agency (for example FM, CSA) and certifies that a particular product meets the Agency's applicable Intrinsic Safety standards for specific types of hazardous classified locations. A portable radio that has been approved for Intrinsic Safety will have an Approval label attached to the radio to identify the unit as being Approved for specified hazardous atmospheres. This label specifies the hazardous Class/Division/Group along with the part number of the battery that must be used. The Intrinsically Safe Approval Label will be located on the portable radio unit. Intrinsically Safe Approval Label IntrinsicallySafeRadioInformation Operational Cautions for Intrinsically Safe Equipment
!
Do not operate radio communications equipment in hazardous environments unless it is a type especially qualified
(e.g., FM/CSA Approved) for such use. An explosion or fire may result.
Do not operate an FM/CSA Approved Product in a hazardous atmosphere if it has been physically damaged (e.g., cracked housing). An explosion or fire may result.
Do not replace or charge batteries in a hazardous atmosphere. Contact sparking may occur while installing or removing batteries and cause an explosion or fire. 111 SafetyandGeneralInformation Warnings for Radios Approved as Intrinsically Safe Portable radio products must ship from the Motorola manufacturing facility with the hazardous atmosphere capability and the intrinsic safety approval labeling (FM, CSA, CEPEL, etc). Portable radio products will not be upgraded to this capability and labeled once they have been shipped to the field. A modification changes the units hardware from its original design configuration. Modifications can only be made by the original product manufacturer.
!!
Do not replace or change accessories in a hazardous atmosphere. Contact sparking may occur while installing or removing accessories and may cause an explosion or fire.
!!
Failure to use an FM/CSA Approved Portable Radio Product with the specific approved battery or accessories may result in a dangerously unsafe condition when being used in a hazardous environment.
Unauthorized or incorrect modification of an Intrinsically Safe approved portable radio product can negate the FM or CSA Approval for that radio unit. Incorrect repair or relabeling of any intrinsically safe Agency-approved radio could adversely affect the Approval rating of the unit.
Use of a radio that is not intrinsically safe in a hazardous atmosphere could result in serious injury or death.
Turn the radio communications equipment off before removing or installing a battery or accessory.
Do not disassemble the FM/CSA Approved Product unit in any way that exposes the internal electrical circuits of the unit. 112
Repair
!!
REPAIRS FOR MOTOROLA PRODUCTS WITH INTRINSICALLY SAFE APPROVAL ARE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER. Repairs to a Motorola FM approved radio product should only be done at a location that has been FM audited under the FM 3605 repairs and service standard. Contact Motorola for assistance regarding repairs and service of Motorola intrinsically safe equipment. A repair constitutes something done internally to the unit that would bring it back to its original condition. Items not considered as repairs are those in which an action is performed on a unit which does not require the outer casing of the unit to be opened in a manner that exposes the internal electrical circuits of the unit. IntrinsicallySafeRadioInformation DoNotSubstituteOptionsorAccessories The Motorola communications equipment certified as intrinsically safe by the approving agency, (FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC) is tested as a complete system which consists of the listed agency Approved portable, Approved battery, and Approved accessories or options, or both. This Approved portable and battery combination must be strictly observed. There must be no substitution of items, even if the substitute has been previously Approved with a different Motorola communications equipment unit. Approved configurations are listed by the Approving Agency
(FM, UL, CSA, CENELEC). The Intrinsically Safe Approval Label affixed to radio refers to the intrinsically safe classification of that radio product, and the approved batteries that can be used with that system. The manual PN referenced on the Intrinsically Safe Approval Label identifies the approved Accessories and or options that can be used with that portable radio unit. Using a non Motorola intrinsically safe battery and or accessory with the Motorola approved radio unit 113 SafetyandGeneralInformation will void the intrinsically safe approval of that radio unit. Accessory Safety Information Important: Save these accessory safety instructions.
Before using any battery or battery charger, read all the instructions for and cautionary markings on (1) the battery, (2) the battery charger, which may include a separate wall-mounted power supply or transformer, and (3) the radio product using the battery.
Do not expose any battery charger to water, rain, or snow as they are designed for indoor or in-vehicle use only.
!!
Warning: To reduce the risk of injury, charge only the rechargeable batteries described in Battery on page 3. Other types of batteries may burst, causing personal injury and damage. 114
To reduce the risk of damage to the cord or plug, pull by the plug rather than the cord when you disconnect the battery charger from the power source outlet.
Do not operate any battery charger with a damaged cord or plug replace them immediately.
Battery chargers may become warm during operation, but not hot. If it becomes hot to the touch, unplug it from the power outlet immediately and discontinue its use.
Use of a non-recommended attachment to a battery charger may result in a risk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons.
Make sure the battery charger power cord is located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or subjected to damage or stress.
An extension cord should not be used with any battery charger unless absolutely necessary. Use of an improper extension cord could result in a risk of fire and electric shock. If an extension cord must be used, make sure that:
The pins on the plug of the extension cord are the same number, size, and shape as those on the plug of the charger.
The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition.
The cord size is 18AWG for lengths up to 100 feet and 16AWG for lengths up to 150 feet.
Do not operate any battery charger if it has received a sharp blow, has been dropped, or has been damaged in any way; take it to a qualified service technician.
Do not disassemble a battery charger; take it to a qualified service technician when service or repair is required. Incorrect reassembly may result in a risk of electric shock or fire.
Maximum ambient temperature around the power supply or transformer of any battery charger should not exceed 40C (104F).
The output power from the power supply or transformer must not exceed the rating given on the Desktop Dual-Pocket Charger.
The disconnection from the line voltage is made by unplugging the power supply from the AC receptacle.
To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug any battery charger from the outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning. For optimum charging performance, turn off the radio product while charging it in any battery charger. AccessorySafetyInformation 115 MOTOROLA LIMITED WARRANTY Note: FOR IDEN SUBSCRIBER PRODUCTS, ACCESSORIES AND SOFTWARE PURCHASED IN THE UNITED STATES OR CANADA What Does this Warranty Cover?
Subject to the exclusions contained below, Motorola, Inc. warrants its Motorola iDEN Digital Mobile and Portable Handsets ("Products"), Motorola-branded or certified accessories sold for use with these Products ("Accessories") and Motorola software contained on CD-Roms or other tangible media and sold for use with these Products ("Software") to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal consumer usage for the period(s) outlined below. This limited warranty is a consumer's exclusive remedy, and applies as follows to new Products, Accessories and Software purchased by consumers in the United States or Canada, which are accompanied by this written warranty:
116 LENGTH OF COVERAGE One (1) year from the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser of the product. One (1) year from the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser of the product. The balance of the original warranty or for ninety (90) days from the date returned to the consumer, whichever is longer. Ninety (90) days from the date of purchase. PRODUCTS COVERED Products as defined above. Accessories as defined above. Products or Accessories that are Repaired or Replaced. Software as defined above. Applies only to physical defects in the media that embodies the copy of the software
(e.g. CD-ROM, or floppy disk). What is not covered? (Exclusions) Normal Wear and Tear. Periodic maintenance, repair and replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear are excluded from coverage. Batteries. Only batteries whose fully charged capacity falls below 80% of their rated capacity and batteries that leak are covered by this limited warranty. Abuse & Misuse. Defects or damage that result from: (a) improper operation, storage, misuse or abuse, accident or neglect, such as physical damage (cracks, scratches, etc.) to the surface of the product resulting from misuse; (b) contact with liquid, water, rain, extreme humidity or heavy perspiration, sand, dirt or the like, extreme heat, or food; (c) use of the Products or Accessories for commercial purposes or subjecting the Product or Accessory to abnormal usage or conditions; or (d) other acts which are not the fault of Motorola, are excluded from coverage. Use of Non-Motorola Products and Accessories. Defects or damage that result from the use of Non-Motorola branded or certified Products, Accessories, Software or other peripheral equipment are excluded from coverage. Unauthorized Service or Modification. Defects or damages resulting from service, testing, adjustment, installation, maintenance, alteration, including without limitation, software changes, or modification in any way by someone other than Motorola, or its authorized service centers, are excluded from coverage. Altered Products. Products or Accessories with
(a) serial numbers or date tags that have been removed, altered or obliterated; (b) broken seals or that show evidence of tampering; (c) mismatched board serial numbers; or (d) nonconforming or non-Motorola housings, antennas, or parts, are excluded from coverage. Communication Services. Defects, damages, or the failure of Products, Accessories or Software due to any communication service or signal you may subscribe to or use with the Products, Accessories or Software is excluded from coverage. Software Embodied in Physical Media. No warranty is made that the software will meet your requirements or will work in combination with any hardware or software applications provided by third parties, that the operation of the software products will be uninterrupted or error free, or that all defects in the software products will be corrected. 117 MOTOROLALIMITEDWARRANTY Software NOT Embodied in Physical Media. Software that is not embodied in physical media
(e.g. software that is downloaded from the internet), is provided "as is" and without warranty. Who is covered? This warranty extends only to the first consumer purchaser, and is not transferable. What will Motorola Do? Motorola, at its option, will at no charge repair, replace or refund the purchase price of any Products, Accessories or Software that does not conform to this warranty. We may use functionally equivalent reconditioned/refurbished/pre-owned or new Products, Accessories or parts. No data, software or applications added to your Product, Accessory or Software, including but not limited to personal contacts, games and ringer tones, will be reinstalled. To avoid losing such data, software and applications please create a back up prior to requesting service. How to Obtain Warranty Service or Other Information? To obtain service or information, please call:
Motorola iDEN Customer Services 1-800-453-0920 or 954-723-4910 TTY-877-483-2840 118 Or visit us online at http://www.motorola.com/iden/support You will receive instructions on how to ship the Products, Accessories or Software, at your expense, to a Motorola Authorized Repair Center. To obtain service, you must include: (a) a copy of your receipt, bill of sale or other comparable proof of purchase; (b) a written description of the problem; (c) the name of your service provider, if applicable; (d) the name and location of the installation facility (if applicable) and, most importantly; (e) your address and telephone number. What Other Limitations Are There? ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, OTHERWISE THE REPAIR, REPLACEMENT, OR REFUND AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER, AND IS PROVIDED IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OF IMPLIED. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE software. No other use, including without limitation disassembly of such Motorola software or exercise of the exclusive rights reserved for Motorola, is permitted. PRODUCT, ACCESSORY OR SOFTWARE, OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF INFORMATION OR DATA, SOFTWARE OR APPLICATIONS OR OTHER FINANCIAL LOSS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE ABILITY OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, ACCESSORIES OR SOFTWARE TO THE FULL EXTENT THESE DAMAGES MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. Some states and jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, or limitation on the length of an implied warranty, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state or from one jurisdiction to another. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted Motorola software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce and distribute copies of the Motorola software. Motorola software may only be copied into, used in, and redistributed with, the Products associated with such Motorola 119 LimitedWarrantyMotorolaCommunicationProducts(International) Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International) Note: This Warranty applies in Singapore and capacity, or the Philippines. I. What This Warranty Covers and For How Long:
MOTOROLA warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured iDEN Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:
iDEN Subscriber Digital Mobile and Portable Units Product Accessories
(manufactured by or under license from MOTOROLA) Batteries One (1) Year One (1) Year One (1) Year 120 Rechargeable Batteries will be replaced during the applicable warranty period if:
a. the battery capacity falls below 80% of rated b. the battery develops leakage. MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment if expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole, or any portion of the system not produced by MOTOROLA, under this warranty. II. General Provisions:
This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLAS responsibilities regarding the Product, Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAS options, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. INLCUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. How to Get Warranty Service:
You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. IV. What This Warranty Does Not Cover:
a. Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. 121 LimitedWarrantyMotorolaCommunicationProducts(International) b. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. c. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. d. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. e. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs
(including, without limitation, the audition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment). f. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. g. Rechargeable batteries if:
1.Any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. 2.The damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. h. Freight costs to the repair depot. i. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with 122 MOTOROLAS published specifications or the local type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. j. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not effect the operation of the Product. k. Normal and customary wear and tear. l. Exclusion for defects or damage arising from use of the products in connection with non-MOTOROLA equipment. VI. Patent and Software Provisions:
MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a patent, and Motorola will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:
a. That MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;
b. That MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software, such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise or rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. settlement or compromise; and c. Should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAS opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or sued in connection with the Product or any parts thereof. In no event shall MOTOROLA be liable for any incidental, special or consequential damages arising from any claim of patent infringement or alleged infringement. 123 Software Copyright Notice The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola and third party software stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola and third party software providers certain exclusive rights for copyrighted software, such as the exclusive rights to distribute or reproduce the copyrighted software. Accordingly, any copyrighted software contained in the Motorola products may not be modified, reverse-engineered, distributed, or reproduced in any manner to the extent allowed by law. Furthermore, the purchase of the Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents, or patent applications of Motorola or any third party software provider, except for the normal, non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Patent and Trademark Information MOTOROLA, the Stylized M Logo and all other trademarks indicated as such herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Reg. U.S. Pat. &
Tm. Off. 2004 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. Microsoft and Microsoft Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. T9 is a trademark owned by Tegic Communications. T9 Text Input Patent and Trademark Information This product is covered by U.S. Pat. 5,818,437, U.S. Pat. 5,953,541, U.S. Pat. 6,011,554 and other patents pending. Java and all other Java-based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. All other product names or services mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective trademark owners. 124 Index Numerics 2-way radio 92 see also Private calls, group calls, and call alerts A Accessories 16 safety 114 Alpha mode 55 Antenna 6 attaching 6 removing 6 B Backlight 91 Battery 3 care 5 charging 4, 5 door 2 inserting 3 safety 110 Baud rate 94 C Call alerts 28 deleting 29 queue 28 receiving 28 responding 28, 29 sending 28 sorting 29 status messages 71 viewing 28 Call filtering 98 Call forwarding all calls 39 missed calls 40 off 40 Call Hold 43 Call Timers 46 Call Waiting 42 off 42 Calls answering automatically 91 answering with any key 91 emergency 21 ending 17 from Contacts 19 from memo 50 from Recent calls 18 group, see Group calls icons 18 international 44 making 17 on hold 43 phone calls 17 Private calls 17, 20, 92 receiving 17 redialing 19, 91 remote PTT 102 Speed Dial 20 TTY, see TTY calls Turbo Dial 20 voice name 20 Circuit data 47 Clock 91 Contacts 19 capacity 37 creating entries 34 deleting 36 editing entries 36 125 Index icons 32 iDEN Phonebook Manager 38 international numbers 37 searching 33 showing all entries 34 showing only Private IDs 34 SIM card 32 storing fast 36 storing from idle screen 36 storing from Memo 36, 50 storing from recent calls 30, 36 type 30, 32 viewing 33 with non-i325 phones 38 D Direct Launch 26 Display backlight 91 colors 91 contrast 91 options 9 screen 9 126 E Email 32, 35, 47 Emergency calls 21 Emergency Group calls 69 ending 70 making 69 receiving 70 End key 1 F Faxes receiving 47 sending 47 G GPS Enabled 78 almanac data 83 best results 81 emergency calls 21, 79 map software 84 privacy options 83 security 84 viewing location 80 GPS PIN 93 GPS, see GPS Enabled Group calls 45, 67, 92 see also Emergency Group calls making 46, 68 off 46, 69 receiving 46, 68 H Handset, see phone Headset 102 Hubs 67 joining 67 setting up 67 viewing 68 I Icons calls 18 Contacts 32 main menu 10 MOSMS messages 65 Recent calls 30 status 11 text entry 55 iDEN Phonebook Manager 38 Idle screen 9 storing to Contacts 36 International numbers 44 calling 44 storing 37 Isolated Operation 70 J Java applications deleting 73 memory 74 K Keypad 1 locking 15, 93 L Language 91 Lists, see menus M Memo 50 calling from 50 creating 50 editing 50 storing to Contacts 36, 50 viewing 50 Memory Java applications 74 MOSMS messages 66 ring tones 53 voice records 88, 89 Menu key 1, 10 Menus 9, 10 context-sensitive 1, 10 main menu 10 Message center 59, 60 see also messages MOSMS messages 62 voice mail 60 Message notifications 58 setting options 58 Messages 58 see also voice mail, MOSMS messages, and SMS messages receiving 58 MOSMS messages 61 creating 62 deleting 65, 66 drafts 64 icons 65 memory 66 message center 62 outbox 64 quick notes 64 receiving 61 sending 62 sent messages 65 setting up 61 MOTOtalk channels 23 codes 23 emergency 26 private MOTOtalk calls 25 setup options 26 talk range 23 using 22 Mute 21 N Navigation key 1 Numeric mode 57 O Over-the-air programming 7 127 Index P Packet data 47 Passwords 93 Patent information 124 Pauses dialing 44 storing 37 Phone 1, 9 active line 91 care 6 locking 93 modem 47 off 6 on 6 only 94 setting up 2 Private Calls 17 Private calls 17 Profiles 95 call filtering 98 changing settings 96 creating 97 deleting 98 editing 98 128 surveillance 96 switching 95 temporary 97 viewing 95 Programming, over-the-air 7 PTT One Touch 20 One Touch, setting 44 PUK code 13 R Radio frequency 105 Recent calls 18, 30 deleting 31 display time 94 icons 30 storing to Contacts 30, 36 viewing 30 Redialing 19, 91 Ring tones 32, 51 deleting 54 downloading 53 memory 53 off 51 setting 51 setting in Contacts 34, 53 silent 51, 52 vibrate 51, 52 viewing assigned 53 Ringer 90 see also Ring tones off 90 S Safety 105 accessory 114 battery 110 driving 130 electromagnetic interference 108 intrinsically safe 111 medical devices 108 radio frequency 105 Security 93 Send key 1 Service, activating 6 Settings 91 resetting 94 Shortcuts creating 100 deleting 101 editing 101 using 100 SIM card 3, 12, 14 Contacts 32 inserting 14 removing 15 with non-i325 phones 38 SIM PIN 12, 93 changing 12 default 12 entering 12 requirement 13 unblocking 13 SMS messages 58, 61 also see MOSMS messages 61 Speakerphone 20 Speed Dial 20, 33, 35 State Tone 27 Status messages 103 in call alerts 71 Surveillance profile 96 Symbols mode 57 T T9 Text Input, see text entry Talkgroup Scan 69 Talkgroups 45, 67, 92 Text display area 9, 18 Text entry 55 Alpha mode 55 database 55, 56 icons 55 mode 55 Numeric mode 57 Symbols mode 57 Word mode 55 Trademark information 124 TTY calls 48 baud rate 49 making 48 mode 48 on 48 Turbo Dial 20 V Voice mail 58, 60 receiving 60 sending calls to 17 setting up 60 Voice name 20, 33 Voice records 87 creating 87 deleting 88 labelling 88 locking 88 memory 88, 89 playing 87 Volume, setting 90, 92 W Waits dialing 44 storing 37 Warranty 120 Word mode 55 129 Driving Safety Tips Safety is your most important call!
Your Motorola wireless telephone gives you the powerful ability to communicate by voice almost anywhere, anytime, wherever wireless phone service is available and safe conditions allow. But an important responsibility accompanies that benefits of wireless phones, one that every user must uphold. When driving a car, driving is your first responsibility. If you find it necessary to use your wireless phone while behind the wheel of a car, practice good common sense and remember the following tips:
Get to know your Motorola wireless phone and its features such as speed dial and redial. If available, these features help you to place your call without taking your attention off the road.
When available, use a hands-free device. If possible, add an additional layer of convenience to your wireless phone with one of the many Motorola Original hands-free accessories available today. 130
Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Be able to access your wireless phone without removing your eyes from the road. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time, if possible, let your voice mail answer it for you. Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, ice, and even heavy traffic can be hazardous. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. Jotting down a to do list or going through your address book takes attention away from your primary responsibility driving safely.
Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan calls when your car will be stationary. If you need to make a call while moving, dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue.
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and suspend conversations which have the potential to divert your attention away from the road.
Your phone can perform many other functions besides allowing you to make and receive calls. Do not let these features distract you from driving. Use them only when it is safe to do so.
Use your wireless phone to call for help. Dial 9-1-1 or other local emergency number in the case of fire, traffic accident or medical emergencies.
Use your wireless phone to help others in emergencies. If you see an auto accident, crime in progress or other serious emergency where lives are in danger, call 9-1-1 or other local emergency number, as you would want others to do for you.
Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless assistance number when necessary. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured, or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or other special non-emergency wireless number. 131
1 2 3 | Ex8a User Manual | Users Manual | 2.21 MiB |
Motorola iDEN Digital Multi-service Data-capable Phone i325 Phone Users Guide SECOND DRAFT
@NNTN5506A@
NNTN5506A IMPORTANT NOTICE: PLEASE READ PRIOR TO USING YOUR PHONE The SIM card provided in this kit is intended for use with the phone provided in this package. Loss of certain features will result when using a SIM card from one of the following models: i30sx, i35s, i50sx, i55sr, i58sx, i60c, i80s, i85s, i88s, i90c, i95cl series, and the i2000 series. For more information on SIM card compatibility, go to www.motorola.com/iden/support. Contents Getting Started........................................... 1 Locating Your SIM Card....................................2 Activating Service..............................................5 Powering On and Off.........................................5 Enabling Over-the-Air Security..........................6 Finding Your Phone Number.............................6 Phone Basics ....................................................7 SIM Card Security ...........................................11 Locking the Keypad.........................................14 Accessories.....................................................15 For More Information.......................................15 Making Calls............................................. 16 Phone Calls.....................................................16 Private Calls ....................................................16 Receiving Calls................................................16 Call Icons.........................................................17 Ways to Enter Calls.........................................17 Using Speakerphone.......................................19 Using Mute ......................................................20 Making Emergency Phone Calls .....................20 Call Alerts..................................................21 Sending Call Alerts..........................................21 Receiving Call Alerts .......................................21 Using the Call Alert Queue..............................21 Recent Calls ..............................................23 Storing Recent Calls to Contacts ....................23 Deleting Recent Calls......................................24 Contacts ....................................................25 Viewing Contacts ............................................26 Creating Entries ..............................................27 Storing Numbers Faster ..................................28 Editing Entries .................................................29 Deleting Entries...............................................29 Checking Capacity ..........................................30 Creating Pauses and Waits.............................30 International Numbers.....................................30 Accessing Contacts with GSM Phones...........31 Call Forwarding ........................................32 Forwarding All Calls ........................................32 i Turning Off Call Forwarding ............................33 Forwarding Missed Calls .................................33 Viewing Call Forwarding Settings....................34 Additional Calling Options...................... 35 Call Waiting .....................................................35 Call Hold..........................................................36 3-Way Calling..................................................36 Creating Pauses and Waits While Dialing.......37 Making International Calls ...............................37 Setting One Touch PTT...................................37 Group Calls .....................................................38 Call Timers ......................................................39 Using Your Phone as a Modem ......................40 Making TTY Calls ............................................41 Memo ........................................................ 43 Ring Tones ............................................... 44 Setting Your Phone to Vibrate.........................44 Turning Ring Tones Off ...................................44 Ring and Vibrate..............................................45 Assigning Ring Tones to Contacts ..................45 ii Viewing Ring Tone Assignments ....................46 Downloading More Ring Tones .......................46 Managing Memory ..........................................46 Deleting Custom Ring Tones ..........................47 Entering Text ............................................48 Using Alpha Mode...........................................48 Using Word Mode ...........................................48 Special Function Keys.....................................49 Using Numeric Mode.......................................50 Using Symbols Mode ......................................50 Advanced Features ..................................51 Making Talkgroup or Hub Calls .......................51 Emergency Group Call....................................52 Isolated Site Operation (ISO) ..........................55 Status Messages.............................................55 Your Messaging Services ........................57 Voice Mail........................................................57 Text Messages................................................57 Receiving Messages ................................59 Message Notifications .....................................59 Message Center ..............................................60 Voice Mail Messages ............................... 61 Receiving a Message......................................61 Accessing Voice Mail from the Message Center ...................................61 Sending Unanswered Calls to Voice Mail .......61 MOSMS Messages ................................... 62 Setting Up........................................................62 Receiving a Message......................................62 Reading from the Message Center .................63 Creating and Sending Messages ....................63 Managing Memory...........................................67 MMS Messages ........................................ 68 Navigating the Inbox, Drafts, and Sent Items..68 Attached Audio Files .......................................68 Creating and Sending Messages ....................69 Drafts...............................................................75 Sent Items .......................................................76 Receiving a Message......................................77 Viewing Received Messages from the Message Center ...........................77 Actions for Received Messages......................78 Customizing MMS ...........................................81 Managing Memory ..........................................83 Other Text Messages for Phones with MMS .......................................................85 SMS Messages ...............................................85 Net Alerts ........................................................86 Java Applications .....................................87 Running Applications ......................................87 Suspending Applications.................................87 Resuming Applications....................................87 Ending Applications.........................................88 Downloading Applications ...............................88 Installing Applications......................................88 Deleting Applications.......................................88 Managing Memory ..........................................89 Shortcuts on the Main Menu ...........................89 Java Applications and GPS Enabled ..............90 GPS Enabled.............................................93 IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind ............93 Making an Emergency Call .............................94 iii Viewing Your Approximate Location ...............95 Enhancing GPS Performance .........................96 Updating Satellite Almanac Data.....................98 Setting Privacy Options ...................................98 Using GPS with Map Software ........................99 Voice Records........................................ 102 Creating Voice Records ................................102 Playing Voice Records ..................................102 Labelling Voice Records................................102 Deleting Voice Records.................................103 Locking Voice Records..................................103 Managing Memory.........................................103 Customizing Your Phone ...................... 105 Setting the Volume........................................105 Setting Your Phone to Not Ring ....................105 Seeing the Display Better..............................106 Using Settings ...............................................106 Profiles ................................................... 109 Viewing Profiles.............................................109 Switching Profiles ..........................................109 iv Surveillance Profile .......................................109 How Changing Settings Affects Profiles........110 Temporary Profiles........................................110 Creating Profiles............................................111 Editing Profiles ..............................................111 Deleting Profiles ............................................112 Setting Call Filtering ......................................112 Shortcuts.................................................114 Creating a Shortcut .......................................114 Using a Shortcut............................................114 Editing a Shortcut ..........................................114 Deleting Shortcuts.........................................115 Using a Headset .....................................116 Attaching a Headset......................................116 Using a Remote PTT Button .........................116 Understanding Status Messages ..........117 Safety and General Information ............119 RF Operational Characteristics .....................119 Portable Radio Product Operation and EME Exposure...................................................119 Electro Magnetic Interference/Compatibility..122 Medical Devices ............................................122 Operational Warnings....................................123 Operational Cautions.....................................124 Accessory Safety Information........................125 MOTOROLA LIMITED WARRANTY ...... 127 Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products
(International) ..................................... 131 Patent and Trademark Information ...... 135 Index ....................................................... 136 Driving Safety Tips ................................ 141 v DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Responsible Party Name: Motorola, Inc. Address: 8000 West Sunrise Boulevard Plantation, FL 33322 USA Phone Number: 1 (800) 453-0920 Hereby declares that the product:
Product Name: i325 Model Number: H62XAH6RR1AN Conforms to the following regulations:
FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d) and section 15.109(a) Class B Digital Device vi Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Getting Started fixed antenna volume controls Push-To-Talk
(PTTT) button option keys speaker
(in back) back key emergency call button audio jack Power button. power button space key microphone accessory connector Navigation key press the arrows to scroll through menus and lists. Menu key accesses context-sensitive menus. Option key selects the option appearing above it on the display. Note: Throughout this User Guide, the option keys will be represented by A. Send key places phone calls. End key ends phone calls; returns to idle screen; in browser mode, returns to Net main menu. 1 Getting Started To start using your i325 phone:
Make sure your SIM card is in place.
Charge the battery.
Activate your service.
Enable over-the-air security. Note: To screw in antenna water seal is critical. Removing the Battery Door 1 Make sure the phone is powered off. 2 Slide the release button forward until it releases the battery door. 3 Remove the battery door from the back of your phone. Locating Your SIM Card Your SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) card is a small piece of white plastic located in the SIM card holder in the back of your phone, underneath the battery. SIM card SIM card holder 2 If your SIM card is not in the SIM card holder, it may be in the box your phone came in, attached to a piece of white plastic about the size of a credit card. If this is the case, carefully detach your SIM card from the surrounding plastic and insert it as described in Inserting Your SIM Card on page 13. If there is no SIM card in your phone or the box, contact your service provider. Battery Inserting the Battery 1 Remove the battery door. 2 Insert the top of the battery into the battery area. Press the bottom of the battery to secure it. Locating Your SIM Card 3 Replace the battery door and press it gently until you hear a click. Charging the Battery Your phone comes with a standard travel charger. 1 Plug the charger into an electrical outlet. 2 Open the connector cover. connector cover 3 Getting Started 3 Plug the other end of the charger into the accessory connector. Charger Attached appears on the display. Tip: To remove the charger from the accessory connector: Press the buttons on the sides of the plug. Pull the plug straight out. 4 When charging the battery for the first time, charge for 30 minutes longer than the time shown in Charging Times. 4 Charging Times See your battery and charger to determine the appropriate charging time. Battery High Performance SC Extra Capacity Maximum Capacity Charger Rapid 2 hours Mid-Rate 4 hours 2.5 hours 5.5 hours 3.5 hours 7.5 hours For best results, charge the batteries within the temperature range of 50F to 104F (10C to 40C). Prolonged charging is not recommended. Removing the Battery 1 With the phone powered off, remove the battery door. 2 Remove the battery by pushing the battery toward the antenna and lifting it out. Battery Use and Maintenance
The Motorola iDEN Approved Lithium Ion chargers provide optimum performance. Other chargers may not fully charge the iDEN Lithium Ion battery or may yield a reduced number of lifetime charge cycles.
Extreme temperatures degrade battery performance. Do not store the battery where temperatures exceed 140F (60C) or fall below 4F (-20C). Lithium Ion batteries have a self discharge rate and without use, lose about 1% of their charge per day.
The battery capacity is degraded if the battery is stored for long periods while fully charged. If long term storage is required, store at half capacity. Activating Service Activating Service The first time you power on your phone, you must be in your local calling area. This activates your service. Powering On and Off To power your phone on:
Press p. To power your phone off:
Press and hold p. When You Power On for the First Time The first time you power your phone on, screen may appear asking you to update your browser information. This means you must enable security. If the Enter SIM PIN Code screen appears, enter your SIM PIN. See Entering the PIN on page 11. Press A under Ok. When you receive your phone, the SIM PIN is 0000. Change your PIN to prevent fraudulent use of the SIM card (see Changing the PIN on page 11). 5
Getting Started As your phone connects to the network, you will see a connecting message. When the idle screen appears, the phone is ready to use. s d1 Contcs S Mesg Enabling Over-the-Air Security If you are set up to receive over-the-air programming from your service provider, you must enable security the first time you power on your phone or within 20 days of first activation of your phone:
1 When you power on your phone for the first time, after the idle screen appears, you will be prompted to select Ok to update your browser information. Note: If you press A under Later, you will be prompted to enable security each time you power on your phone until you press A under Ok. 6 2 Press A under Ok. 3 You are prompted to enable security. Press A under Yes. A series of screens appears. If you subscribe to your service providers plan, your home page appears. 4 Press e to return to the idle screen. Within 24 hours of enabling security, you will receive a Net alert containing your Private ID and Talkgroup lists for Private calls. To accept programming:
1 When you receive a Net alert saying New Browser Message - Receive Programming Info, press A under Goto. 2 You are prompted to accept changes to your lists. Press A under Ok. 3 If you are prompted again to accept changes to your lists, press A under Ok. 4 A confirmation screen displays. Press A under Ok. 5 Press e to return to the idle screen. Finding Your Phone Number My Info lets you view your phone number, Private ID, and other phone information:
1 Press m to access the main menu. 2 Scroll to My Info. 3 Press A under Select. 4 Scroll to see your information:
Name Enter your name. See Entering Text on page 48.
Line 1 and Line 2 your phone numbers for phone lines 1 and 2. These are filled in when you receive your first phone call after enabling over-the-air security on your phone.
Private ID Your Private ID is the number that others use to contact you using Private calls. It is filled in when you receive your first Private call.
Group ID the number of the Hub you have joined.
Carrier IP the IP address assigned to your service provider. It is filled in when you register for packet data services. IP1 Address and IP2 Address the IP addresses you use to access the Internet with your phone.
Ckt Your circuit data number is the number you use if you want to use your phone to transfer circuit data. See Using Your Phone as a Modem on page 40. You receive this number from your service provider.
Service Status This information may be used by your service provider if there is a problem with your phones services. Phone Basics Phone Basics Any time your phone is powered on, the display provides you with information and options. s d1 status icons text area menu icon display options Contcs S Mesg The screen shown above is the idle screen. The text that appears on your idle screen depends on your service provider. The idle screen appears when your phone is on, but not engaged in any activity. Text Area This area displays menus, messages, names, phone numbers, and other information. 7
Getting Started Display Options Two display options appear at the bottom of most screens. You select a display option by pressing the option key below it. Menus and Lists Your phones features are arranged in menus, submenus, and lists. To access the items in a menu or list, scroll using the navigation key at the top of your keypad. This key lets you scroll up, down, left, or right. Holding down the appropriate part of the navigation key speeds up scrolling. In this guide, this symbol > tells you to select a menu or list item. For example, Settings >
Security means:
1 Scroll to Settings on the main menu. 2 Press A under Select to see the Settings screen. 3 Scroll to Security. 4 Press A under Select to see the Security screen. 8 Menu Key Many features provide context-sensitive menus that let you access related features and actions. The S icon appears any time a context-sensitive menu is available. Press m to access the menu. Main Menu All your phones features can be accessed through the main menu. When you are using a feature, the icon for that feature appears in the upper left corner of the display. Browse the Web. Java applications on your phone. See page 87. Customize your phone. See page 105. a Browser q Java Apps Settings Display/Info Phone Calls DC/GC Options Personalize 2-Way Radio Volume Security Advanced c VoiceRecord Record and play audio messages. See page 102. Contacts new contact form list of contacts Contacts menu View, store, edit contacts. See page 25. e Messages
[Compose Message]
Voice Mail Inbox Drafts Sent Items SMS Net Alert f Call Forward g Memo h Call Timers i Recent Calls list of calls recent calls menu Call Setup menu Shortcuts Access messages. See page 57. Set call forwarding options. See page 32. Store a number to access later. See page 43. Phone usage information. See page 39. Lists recent calls. See page 23. Create shortcuts to screens. See page 114. Phone Basics Groups of settings you apply together. See page 109. View personal phone information, including phone number and Private ID. See page 6. Lists call alerts. See page 21. Find your approximate geographical location. See page 93. Assign ring tones and turn ringer off. See page 44. Profiles new profile form list of profiles j My Info k Call Alert list of call alerts Call Alerts menu l GPS m Ring Tones VibeAll list of ring tones Ring Tones menu 9 Getting Started Status Icons Status icons appear in the two rows at the top of the display. Some appear at all times. Others appear only when your phone is engaged in certain activities or when you have activated certain features. a b c d e f g d o p q r s A B C 1 2 10 Battery Strength More bars on the battery indicate a greater charge. Signal Strength More bars next to the antenna indicate a stronger signal. Phone In Use Your phone is active on a phone call. Private In Use Your phone is active on a Private call. Talkgroup In Use Your phone is active on a group call. Active Phone Line 1 indicates phone line 1 is ready to make calls; 2 indicates phone line 2 is ready to make calls. Scan Indicates the Scan setting is on. Talkgroup Icon Your phone is active as a group call Emergency Call Indicates your phone is active on an emergency call. Call Forward Your phone is set to forward calls. See Call Forwarding on page 32. GHI J K L uvM Ringer Off Your phone is set not to ring. See Turning Ring Tones Off on page 44. wy x Messages You have one or D YZ P more messages. See Receiving Messages on page 59. Internet You are ready to browse the internet. Packet Data You are ready to transfer packet data or are transferring packet data. See Using Your Phone as a Modem on page 40. Roaming You are using your phone outside your carrier's network. SIM Card Security Your SIM card protects your personal information. The SIM card stores all your Contacts information. Since this information is stored on your SIM card, not in your phone, you can remove the information by removing your SIM card. Note: Except for making emergency phone calls, your phone will not function without the SIM card. To prevent unauthorized use of your phone, your SIM card is protected by a PIN that you enter each time the phone is powered on. You can change the PIN or turn off the requirement that it be entered. Entering the PIN You may be required to enter a SIM PIN when you first use your phone. When you receive your phone, the SIM PIN is 0000. Change your PIN to prevent fraudulent use of the SIM card. SIM Card Security Important: If you enter your PIN incorrectly 3 times, your SIM card is blocked. To unblock your SIM card, you must contact your service provider. See Unblocking the PIN. 1 When the Enter SIM PIN Code screen appears, enter your SIM PIN. An asterisk appears for each character entered. 2 Press A under Ok. Changing the PIN 1 From the main menu, select Settings >
Security > Change Password > SIM PIN. 2 At the Enter Old SIM PIN Code screen, enter the current SIM PIN. 3 Press A under Ok. 4 At the Enter New SIM PIN Code screen, enter the new 4- to 8-digit SIM PIN. 5 Press A under Ok. 6 At the Re-enter New SIM PIN Code screen, re-enter the new SIM PIN to confirm. 7 Press A under Ok. 11 Getting Started Turning the PIN Requirement On and Off When the SIM PIN requirement is on, you are prompted to enter your PIN each time you turn on your phone. Note: If a SIM PIN is required, your phone will not function until the SIM PIN is entered, except for making emergency calls. When the PIN requirement is off, your phone can be used without entering a PIN. Important: When the SIM PIN requirement is off, the personal data on your SIM card is not protected. Anyone can use your phone and access your personal data. 1 From the main menu, select Settings >
Security > SIM PIN. 2 Select On or Off. 3 Enter the current SIM PIN. 4 Press A under Ok. Unblocking the PIN If you enter your PIN incorrectly 3 times, your SIM card is blocked. To unblock your SIM card, you must contact your service provider to get a PIN Unblock Code (PUK). 12 Important: If you unsuccessfully enter the PUK code 10 times, your SIM card is permanently blocked and must be replaced. If this happens, all data is lost. You will get a message to contact your service provider. Except for making emergency calls, your phone will not function with a blocked SIM card. To unblock the PIN:
1 Press * # m 1. 2 At your service provider representatives request, provide the information needed to give you a PUK code. 3 Select Unblock PIN. 4 Enter the PUK code. 5 Enter a new 4- to 8-digit SIM PIN. 6 Re-enter your SIM PIN. If you entered the codes properly, SIM Unlocked appears on the display. SIM Card Security Inserting Your SIM Card With your phone powered off, remove the battery door and battery. See Removing the Battery on page 4. 1 Hold your SIM card as shown. Do not touch the gold-colored area. cut corner 2 Carefully slide your SIM card into your phone, until it lies flat in the SIM card holder. SIM card holder Inserting and Removing Your SIM Card Important: Do not touch the gold-colored areas of your SIM card. Switching SIM Cards Moving your SIM card from one phone to another moves all your Contacts information, but erases other information. If you remove your SIM card and use it with another phone, or use another SIM card with your phone, the following information is erased:
The recent calls list
Call forwarding settings
Net alerts
Options set using the MMS Setup menu
Mobile originated text messages, drafts, and quick notes Information stored in Memo 3 most recent GPS Enabled locations
Voice records
Voice names 13
Getting Started Removing Your SIM Card Important: To avoid loss or damage, do not remove your SIM card from your phone unless absolutely necessary. 1 With your phone powered off, remove the battery door and battery. 2 While holding the tab down, slide your SIM card out of the SIM card holder. SIM card holder tab Note: Protect your SIM card as you would any delicate object. Store it carefully. 14 Locking the Keypad Locking the phones keypad prevents its buttons from being pressed. When the keypad is locked, you can only:
Power the phone on and off
Unlock the keypad
Respond to incoming calls, messages, and alerts Important: Emergency phone calls cannot be placed while the keypad is locked. To lock the keypad:
1 From the idle screen, press m. 2 Press *. If you press a key while the keypad is locked, instructions for unlocking the keypad display briefly. To unlock the keypad:
1 From the idle screen, press m. 2 Press *. While the keypad is locked, you can respond to incoming calls, messages, and alerts just as you do when the keypad is not locked. When finished, press e to return to the idle screen. The keypad remains locked. Note: Emergency Group Accessories To order accessories, log on to our Web site at www.motorola.com/store/iden or contact your Motorola Authorized Retailer. For More Information If you have questions about your i325 phone, contact your sales representative or your service provider. Accessories 15 Making Calls Your i325 phone makes two types of calls: digital cellular phone calls and Private calls. With Private calls, you use your phone as a long-range, digital walkie-talkie. Phone Calls 1 Enter the number you want to call. 2 Press s to place the call. 3 Press e to end the call. Private Calls 1 Enter the Private ID you want to call. 2 Press and hold the PTT button on the side of your phone. Begin talking after your phone emits a chirping sound. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. Tip: To let someone know you want to talk to him or her on a Private call, send a call alert. See Call Alerts on page 21. 16 Receiving Calls Phone Calls When you receive a phone call, your phone rings, vibrates, or lights up its backlight. Answering Press s. -or-
Press A under Yes. -or-
Press any number key. To answer a call by pressing any number key, you must have the Any Key Ans feature turned on (see Phone Calls Features on page 106). Sending to Voice Mail Press e. -or-
Press A under No. Ending Press e. Private Calls When you receive a Private call, your phone emits a chirping sound or vibrates. Answering 1 Wait for the caller to finish speaking. 2 Press and hold the PTT button on the side of your phone. Begin talking after your phone emits a chirping sound or vibrates. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. Call Icons When you make a call, call icons appear in the text area of the phones display. X Placing a phone call. W Receiving a phone call. Y Phone call is active. Z Phone call is on hold. U Phone call ended. When you miss a call, this icon appears in the text area:
V You missed a phone call. Ways to Enter Calls To enter the number you want to call, you can:
Use the numbers on the keypad
Select the number from the recent calls list Call Icons
Select the number from Contacts
Redial the last phone number called
Use Speed Dial or Turbo Dial
Use One Touch PTT to make a Private call
Use a TTY device see Making TTY Calls on page 41 From the Keypad To enter the number you want to call, press the numbers on the keypad. If you make a mistake:
To clear a digit, press A under Delete.
To clear all digits, press and hold A under Delete.
To insert or delete a digit anywhere in the string of digits you have entered, scroll left or right.
To cancel, press e. From the Recent Calls List The recent calls list stores the last 20 calls you made or received. To select a number from the recent calls list as the number you want to call:
1 From the idle screen, scroll down. -or-
17 Making Calls From the main menu, select Recent Calls. 2 Scroll to the name or number you want to call. From Contacts If you have numbers stored in Contacts, you can use these numbers to make calls. For information on entering numbers into Contacts, see Creating Entries on page 27. Calling from the Contacts List 1 From the main menu, select Contacts. 2 Scroll to the name or number you want to call. Tip: To find Contacts entries faster, use the keypad to enter the first letter of the name. 3 Place the call now. -or-
Scroll left or right to display the Contacts type for the number you want to call. If you are making a Private call, your phone places the call to the Private ID stored in the Contacts entry, even if the Private icon is not displayed. If you are making a phone call:
Your phone places the call to the phone number assigned to the Contacts type displayed. If the Contacts type displayed is not a phone number, your phone places the call to the phone number stored in the Contacts entry. 18 If the Contacts type displayed is not a phone number and you have more than one phone number stored in the Contacts entry, your phone prompts you to select the phone number you want to place the call to. Calling from a Contacts Entry 1 From the main menu, select Contacts. 2 Scroll to the name or number you want to call. 3 Press A under View. -or-
If View is not one of your options: Press m. Select View. 4 Place the call now. -or-
Scroll to view more numbers. When you place the call, it is made to the number displayed. Redialing the Last Number Press and hold s to place a call to the last phone number you called. Using a Voice Name Note: This is an optional feature. Contact your service provider about its availability for purchase.
If you have created a voice name in Contacts for the number you want to call, say the voice name into your phone to enter the number. See page 26 for information on voice names. Your phone plays the name back to you. If you are making a Private call, press the PTT button to place the call. If you are making a phone call, the call is placed automatically. Tip: To stop a phone call from being completed, press e. Using Speed Dial and Turbo Dial Each phone number stored in Contacts is assigned a Speed Dial number which you can use to enter that number. Speed Dial 1 From the idle screen, use the keypad to enter the Speed Dial number assigned to the phone number you want to call. 2 Press #. 3 Press s. Using Speakerphone Turbo Dial From the idle screen, press and hold the Speed Dial number (1 through 9) assigned to the phone number you want to call. Using One Touch PTT One Touch PTT sets your phone to call the most recent Private ID on the recent calls list, or a Private ID you choose, every time you press the PTT button. See Setting One Touch PTT on page 37. Using Speakerphone Note: This is an optional feature. Contact your service provider about its availability for purchase. Turning on speakerphone makes incoming sound come out of the phones speaker instead of the earpiece. Speakerphone is available whenever you are on an active phone call. To turn speakerphone on or off:
Press A under Speaker. -or-
Press t. 19 response center has the equipment to process location information. See GPS Enabled on page 93, and particularly IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind on page 93 and Making an Emergency Call on page 94, for more information on the limitations of this feature. Because of the limitations of this feature, always provide your best knowledge of your location to the emergency response center when you make an emergency call. Important: Emergency phone calls cannot be placed while the keypad is locked. Important: If you have not registered on the network, emergency calls cannot be placed while your SIM card is in your phone. Making Calls Using Mute Muting calls lets you listen to incoming sound without transmitting sound. Mute is available whenever you are on an active call. To turn mute on:
Press A under Mute. While mute is on, Unmute appears as a display option. To turn mute off:
Press A under Unmute. Making Emergency Phone Calls Your phone supports emergency calling. Emergency phone calls can be made even when your SIM card is blocked or not in your phone. Dial 911 to be connected to an emergency response center. If you are on an active call, you must end it before calling 911. When you make an emergency call, your phones GPS Enabled feature can help emergency service personnel find you, if you are in a location where your phone's GPS antenna has established a clear view of the open sky and your local emergency 20 Call Alerts Sending a call alert lets the recipient know you want to talk to him or her on a Private call. When you send a call alert, the recipients phone emits a series of beeps and displays your name or Private ID. The recipient can:
Answer begin a Private call with the sender
Queue store the call alert to the call alert queue, which is a list of call alerts
Clear dismiss and delete the call alert Sending Call Alerts 1 Enter the Private ID you want to send to, as you would when making a Private call. 2 Press A under Alert. Ready to Alert appears on the display. 3 Press the PTT button until Alert Successful appears on the display. Note: If the alert is not successful, this may mean the person you are trying to reach is on a call or has the phone turned off. Receiving Call Alerts When you receive a call alert, you must answer, queue, or clear it. You cannot receive phone calls or Private calls until you do. To answer a call alert, press the PTT button to make a Private call to the sender. To queue a call alert, press A under Queue. To clear a call alert, press A under Clear. Note: The recent calls list also stores call alerts you have received. They appear as Private calls. Call alerts remain in your recent calls list until you delete them or until they reach the end of the list. Using the Call Alert Queue When you queue a call alert, it remains in the call alert queue until you make a Private call to the sender or delete it. Viewing Call Alerts 1 From the main menu, select Call Alert. 2 Scroll through the list. 21 Call Alerts Viewing Date and Time To view the date and time a call alert was received:
1 From the main menu, select Call Alert. 2 Scroll to the call alert you want information on. 3 Press m. 4 Select View. Responding to Call Alerts in the Queue After you queue a call alert, you can respond to it by making a Private call to the sender or sending a call alert to the sender. Making a Private Call to the Sender 1 From the main menu, select Call Alert. 2 Scroll to the call alert you want to respond to. 3 Press the PTT button to begin the call. This removes the call alert from the queue. Sending a Call Alert to the Sender 1 From the main menu, select Call Alert. 2 Scroll to the call alert you want to respond to. 3 Press A under Alert. Ready to Alert appears on the display. 4 Press the PTT button until Alert Successful appears on the display. 22 Deleting Call Alerts To delete a call alert from the queue:
1 From the call alert queue, scroll to the call alert you want to delete. 2 Press m. 3 Select Delete. 4 Press A under Yes to confirm. To delete all call alerts from the queue:
1 From the call alert queue, press m. 2 From the call alert menu, select Delete All. 3 Press A under Yes to confirm. Sorting Call Alerts Tip: You must have at least one call alert in the queue to access this feature. To sort call alerts by the order they were received:
1 From the main menu, select Call Alert. 2 Press m. 3 Select Sort By. 4 Scroll to First on Top or Last on Top. 5 Press A under Select. Recent Calls The recent calls list stores the numbers of the 20 most recent calls you have made and received. To view the recent calls list:
1 From the idle screen, press the down arrow on the navigation key. -or-
From the main menu, select Recent Calls. 2 Scroll through the list. If the number of a recent call is stored in Contacts, the name associated with the number appears on the recent calls list. An icon appears beside the name or number indicating the Contacts type of the number used in the call. See Contacts on page 25. For phone calls, an icon appears to the left of the name or number giving more information about the call:
X A call you made. W A call you received. V A missed call. Missed calls appear on the recent calls list only if you have Caller ID. Note: The recent calls list also stores call alerts you have received. They appear as Private calls. Call alerts remain in your recent calls list until you delete them or until they reach the end of the list. To get more information on a recent call:
1 From the recent calls list, scroll to the call you want information on. 2 Press A under View. -or-
If View is not one of your options: Press m. Select View. This displays information such as the name associated with the call, the number, the date, time, and duration of the call. Storing Recent Calls to Contacts 1 From the recent calls list, scroll to the number you want to store. 2 Press A under Store. -or-
If Store is not one of your options: Press m. Select Store. Tip: If Store is not on this menu, the number is already stored in Contacts. 23 Recent Calls 3 To store the number as a new entry, select [New Contact]. -or-
To store the number to an existing entry, select the entry. 4 With the Contacts type field highlighted, scroll left or right to display the Contacts type you want to assign to the number. For information on Contacts types, see page 25. 5 If you want to add more information to the entry, follow the applicable instructions in Creating Entries on page 27. 6 Press A under Done. Deleting Recent Calls To delete a call:
1 From the recent calls list, scroll to the call you want to delete. 2 Press m. 3 Select Delete. 4 Press A under Yes to confirm. To delete all calls:
1 From the recent calls list, press m. 2 Select Delete All. 3 Press A under Yes to confirm. 24 Contacts Contacts stores up to 600 numbers or addresses. Each Contacts entry can store several numbers or addresses. Information stored in Contacts is saved on your SIM card. A Contacts entry contains:
A name A name is required if you are storing more than one number or address to the entry;
otherwise, it is optional. Typically, this is the name of the person whose contact information is stored in the entry.
A ring tone You can assign a ring tone to each entry. This is the sound your phone makes when you receive phone calls or call alerts from any of the numbers stored in the entry.
A Contacts type Each number or address stored must be assigned a Contacts type:
A Mobile B Private C Work1 D Work2 E Home F Email G Fax H Pager I Talkgroup J IP K Other Hub phone number Private ID phone number phone number phone number email address phone number phone number Talkgroup number IP address phone number talkgroup/group calls
A number or address Each Contacts entry must contain a number or address. This may be any type of phone number, Private ID, Talkgroup number, email address, or IP address. 25 Contacts Note: You can store numbers up to 64 digits long, but every 20 digits must be separated by a pause or wait. See Creating Pauses and Waits on page 30.
A Speed Dial number When you store a phone number, it is assigned a Speed Dial number. You can accept the default Speed Dial number or change it.
A voice name If you create a voice name for a number, you can then dial that number by saying the voice name into your phone. This icon appears P to the left of the Contacts type icon if a voice name is assigned. Note: This is an optional feature. Contact your service provider about its availability for purchase. Viewing Contacts To access Contacts:
Press A under Contcs. -or-
From the main menu, select Contacts. -or-
If you are on a call: Press m. Select Contacts. To view entries:
1 From the Contacts list, scroll to the entry you want to view. 26 2 If an entry has more than one number or address stored, <> surrounds the Contacts type icon. Scroll left or right to view the icon for each number stored in the entry. 3 When the icon for the number or address you want to view is displayed, press A under View.
-or-
If View is not one of your options: Press m. Select View. 4 Scroll to view the other numbers and addresses stored for the entry. Tip: To view more entries, continue scrolling. Searching for a Name To search for a name in Contacts:
1 From the Contacts list, press m. 2 Select Search. 3 Enter the name you want to see. See Entering Text on page 48. 4 Press A under Ok. Your phone finds the name you entered or the nearest match. Showing Only Private IDs and Groups To set Contacts to show only entries that contain Private IDs and Group entries:
1 From the Contacts list, press m. 2 Select Filter. 3 With Show Prvt/Grp highlighted, press A under Select. To set Contacts to show all entries:
1 From the Contacts list, press m. 2 Select Filter. 3 With Show All highlighted, press A under Select. Creating Entries A number or address and a Contacts type are required for all Contacts entries. Other information is optional. You may enter the information in any order by scrolling through the entry details. After you have entered the number or address, Contacts type, and any other information you want, you can press A under Done to save the entry to Contacts. To cancel a Contacts entry at any time press, e to return to the idle screen. Creating Entries Tip: In some fields that require you to enter information, you can begin entering the information from the keypad instead of pressing A under Change. To create a Contacts entry:
1 To access the entry details screen:
Select Contacts > [New Contact]. -or-
From the Contacts list, press m. Scroll to New. Press A under Select. 2 If you want to assign a name to the entry:
With the Name field highlighted, press A under Change. Enter the name. See Entering Text on page 48. When you are finished, press A under Ok. 3 If you want to assign a ring tone to the name:
With the Ringer field highlighted, press A under Change. Scroll to the ring tone you want to assign. Press A under Select. 4 To assign a Contacts type to the number or address being stored:
With the Contacts type field highlighted, press A under Change. 27 Contacts Scroll to the Contacts type you want to assign. Press A under Select. 5 To store a number or address:
With the # field (or ID for an email address, or IP for an IP address) highlighted, press A under Change. Enter the number or address. For phone numbers, use the 10-digit format. For email addresses, see Entering Text on page 48. Tip: Press A under Browse to select a number or address from Contacts, the recent calls list, or Memo. When you are finished, press A under Ok. 6 If you want to assign more options to the number, press A under Change with the
[Options] field highlighted. See Assigning Options. 7 If you want to add more numbers or addresses to the entry:
Scroll past the information you already entered. Enter the additional information for the entry using step 2 through step 6. You must assign a name to the entry, if you have not already. 8 Press A under Done. 28 Note: You can only alias a Hub, not create it. This is provisioned by your service provider. Assigning Options 1 If you have not already, press A under Change with the [Options] field highlighted 2 The default Speed Dial number assigned to a phone number is displayed in the Speed # field. This is always the next available Speed Dial location. If you want to assign the phone number to a different Speed Dial location:
With the Speed # field highlighted, press A under Change. Press and hold A under Delete to delete the current Speed Dial number. Enter the new Speed Dial number using the keypad. When you are finished, press A under Ok. 3 When you are finished, press A under Back. Storing Numbers Faster To store numbers to Contacts from the recent call list, see Storing Recent Calls to Contacts on page 23. To store numbers to Contacts from Memo, see Memo on page 43. To store numbers to Contacts from the idle screen:
1 Use the keypad to enter the number you want to store. 2 Press m. 3 Select Store Number. 4 To store the number as a new entry, select [New Contact]. -or-
To store the number to an existing entry, select the entry. 5 With the Contacts type field highlighted, scroll left or right to display the Contacts type you want to assign to the number. 6 If you want to add more information to the entry, follow the applicable instructions in Creating Entries on page 27. 7 Press A under Done. Editing Entries 1 From the Contacts list, scroll to the entry you want to edit. 2 Press m. 3 Select Edit. The entry details screen displays. Editing Entries 4 Follow the applicable instructions in Creating Entries on page 27 to edit the various fields. Deleting Entries Delete an Entry 1 From the Contacts list, scroll to the entry you want to delete. 2 Press m. 3 To delete the entire entry, scroll to Delete Contact. 4 Press A under Select. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. Delete a Number or Address 1 From the Contacts list, scroll to the entry that contains the number or address you want to delete. 2 Scroll left or right to display the Contacts type for the number you want to delete. 3 Press m. 4 Scroll to Delete Number. 5 Press A under Select. 6 Press A under Yes to confirm. 29 Contacts Note: If an entry contains only one number or address, deleting the number or address deletes the entry. Checking Capacity To see how many numbers are stored in Contacts:
1 From the Contacts list, press m. 2 Select Capacity. Creating Pauses and Waits When storing a number, you can program your phone to pause or wait between digits while dialing. A pause makes your phone pause for 3 seconds before dialing further. A wait makes your phone wait for your response before dialing further. This feature is useful when using voice mail or other automated phone systems that require you to dial a phone number and then enter an access number. To program a pause:
Press and hold * until the letter P appears. The P represents a 3-second pause. If you store 17035551235P1234, when you select this number and make a call, your phone dials the first 11 digits, pauses for 3 seconds, then dials the last 4 digits. 30 If you want a pause longer than 3 seconds, press and hold * more than once. Each P represents a 3-second pause. To program a wait:
Press and hold * until the letter W appears. The W means your phone waits before dialing further. If you store 17035551235W1234, when you select this number and make a call, your phone dials the first 11 digits and then waits. A message appears asking if you want to send the rest of the digits. Press A under Yes to dial the last 4 digits. Tip: You can create pauses and waits while dialing a number from the keypad. See Creating Pauses and Waits While Dialing on page 37. International Numbers Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. When storing a number that you plan to use for international calls, use Plus Dialing:
1 Press and hold 0 for two seconds. A 0 appears, then changes to a +. Accessing Contacts with GSM Phones Note: The network translates the + into the appropriate international access code needed to place the call. 2 Enter the country code, city code or area code, and phone number. For information about making international calls, see Making International Calls on page 37. Accessing Contacts with GSM Phones If you plan to use the information stored in Contacts with an i2000, i2000plus, or any other GSM phone, you must purchase CompanionPro. Go to www.motorola.com/idenupdate or your service providers web site for more information. You can use CompanionPro to make the Contacts information saved to your i325 phones SIM card accessible in this type of phone. 31 Call Forwarding Call forwarding sends calls to the phone numbers you specify. You can forward all calls to one number or forward missed calls to different numbers depending on the reason you missed the call. You can forward phone lines 1 and 2 independently. Forwarding All Calls When you set your phone to forward all calls, an icon appears in the top row of the display:
G Phone line 1 is active; calls to phone line 1 are being forwarded. H Phone line 1 is active; calls to phone line 2 are being forwarded. I Phone line 1 is active; calls to phone lines 1 and 2 are being forwarded. J Phone line 2 is active; calls to phone line 1 are being forwarded. K Phone line 2 is active; calls to phone line 2 are being forwarded. 32 L Phone line 2 is active; calls to phone lines 1 and 2 are being forwarded. To forward all calls:
1 From the main menu, select Call Forward. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Select All Calls. 4 Scroll to To. 5 Press A under Change. 6 If you specified a forwarding number for all calls before, this number displays. To forward calls to this number, press A under Back. -or-
To delete this number, press A under Change, then press and hold A under Delete. To enter the number you want to forward calls to:
Enter the number using your keypad. -or-
Press A under Search. Select Contacts, Recent Calls, or Memo. Select the number you want to enter. 7 Press A under Ok. All your calls are now forwarded to the number you specified. Tip: In some fields, you can select an option by scrolling left or right instead of pressing A under Change. Turning Off Call Forwarding If you dont want all your calls forwarded, turn the feature off:
1 From the main menu, select Call Forward. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Select All Calls. 4 Scroll to To. 5 Press A under Change. 6 Scroll to Off. 7 Press A under Select. All your calls are now sent to your phone. Calls you miss are forwarded according to the options set for missed calls. By default, missed calls are forwarded to voice mail. Forwarding Missed Calls You can specify a forwarding number for each type of missed call:
If Busy Your phone is on a call or transferring data. Turning Off Call Forwarding If No Answer You do not answer on the first 4 rings. If Unreachable Your phone is out of coverage or powered off. Note: If you want a type of missed call sent to voice mail, the call forwarding number for that type of missed call must be your voice mail access number. To forward missed calls:
1 From the main menu, select Call Forward. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Select Detailed. 4 Scroll to If Busy to specify a forwarding number for calls received when your phone is busy. 5 Press A under Change. 6 If you specified a forwarding number for this type of call before, this number displays. To forward calls to this number, press A under Back and go to step 9. -or-
To delete this number, press A under Change, then press and hold A under Delete. 7 To enter the number you want to forward this type of call to:
Enter the number using your keypad. -or-
33
Call Forwarding Press A under Search. Select Contacts, Recent Calls, or Memo. Select the number you want to enter. 8 Press A under Ok. 9 Repeat step 4 through step 8 for If No Answer and If Unreachable. When you are finished, press A under Back. Viewing Call Forwarding Settings 1 From the main menu, select Call Forward. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Select All Calls. 4 Scroll to To. 5 Press m. 6 Select Retrieve Status. 34 Additional Calling Options Call Waiting Call Waiting lets you receive a second call while on an active call. Call Waiting is always available, unless you turn it off for a specific call. If you are on a call and receive a second call, your phone emits a tone and displays a message saying you are receiving a second call. To accept the second call and put the active call on hold:
Press A under Yes. To accept the second call and end the active call:
1 Press e. Your phone rings with the second call. 2 Answer the second call. To decline the second call:
Press A under No. If you subscribe to voice mail, the call is forwarded to your voice mail box, unless you set Call Forward for If Busy to a different number. Switching Between Calls When you accept a second call, the display shows the name or number of each call, with an icon indicating which call is active:
Y Phone call is active. Z Phone call is on hold. To make the call on hold active and put the active call on hold:
Press A under Switch. Turn Off Call Waiting To turn off Call Waiting during a call:
1 Press m. 2 Select In Call Setup > Call Waiting. 3 Press A under Change. 4 Scroll to Off. Tip: To turn Call Waiting back on while still on the call: Scroll to On. 5 Press A under Select. 35 Additional Calling Options To turn off Call Waiting for the next call you make or receive:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone Calls > Call Waiting. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Scroll to Off. 4 Press A under Select. Call Waiting is turned back on when you end the call. Call Hold Call Hold lets you put an active call on hold and make a second call. To put a call on hold:
1 While on an active call, press m. 2 Scroll to Hold. 3 Press A under Select. 4 If you want to make the call active again, press A under Resum. To make a second call while a call is on hold:
1 Enter the number you want to call. Tip: To enter the number from Contacts: Press m. Select Contacts. 2 Press s to place the call. 36 To end the second call and make the call on hold active again:
Press e. To make the call on hold active and put the active call on hold:
Press A under Switch. 3-Way Calling Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. 3-way calling lets you combine 2 phone calls into one. All 3 people in the call can speak to and hear each other. To make a 3-way call:
1 Place or receive a phone call. 2 While the call is active, press A under 3-Way. This puts the call on hold. 3 Enter the second phone number you want to call. Tip: To enter the number from Contacts: Press m. Select Contacts. 4 Press s to place the call. 5 While the second call is active, press m. 6 Scroll to 3 Way. 7 Press A under Select. Both calls are now active and appear on the display. Creating Pauses and Waits While Dialing You can enter a pause or wait while dialing a number. For more information on pauses and waits, see Creating Pauses and Waits on page 30. To create a pause while dialing a phone number:
1 From the keypad, enter the digits you want to occur before the pause. 2 Press m. 3 Select Insert Pause. 4 Enter the digits you want to occur after the pause. To create a wait while dialing a phone number:
1 From the keypad, enter the digits you want to occur before the wait. 2 Press m. 3 Select Insert Wait. 4 Enter the digits you want to occur after the wait. Creating Pauses and Waits While Dialing Making International Calls Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. Plus Dialing lets you place an international call to most countries without entering the local international access code. 1 Press and hold 0 for two seconds. A 0 appears, then changes to a +. Note: The network translates the + into the appropriate international access code needed to place the call. 2 Enter the country code, city code or area code, and phone number. Setting One Touch PTT One Touch PTT sets your phone to call the most recent Private ID or Hub on the recent calls list, or a Private ID or Hub you choose, every time you press the PTT button. To set your phone to call the most recent Private ID on the recent calls list:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > 2-Way Radio > One Touch PTT. 2 Scroll to Last Call. 3 Press A under Select. 37 Additional Calling Options To set your phone to call a Private ID you choose:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > 2-Way Radio > One Touch PTT > Assigned Number. 2 To enter the Private ID you want your phone to call every time you press the PTT button:
Enter the number using your keypad. -or-
Press A under Search. Select Contacts, Recent Calls, or Memo. Select the number you want to enter. Tip: If you are entering a Talkgroup number, enter # before the number. 3 Press A under Ok. To turn off One Touch PTT:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > 2-Way Radio > One Touch PTT. 2 Scroll to Off. 3 Press A under Select. Group Calls A group call is a call made to all members of a Talkgroup at once. A Talkgroup is a predetermined group of up to 25 Private IDs. Before you can make or receive group calls, a Talkgroup must be established. After the Talkgroup is established, you must join the Talkgroup. 38 Joining a Talkgroup Your sales representative or your service provider establishes Talkgroups for you and assigns each Talkgroup a Talkgroup number. You can choose a name for each of your Talkgroups when you create entries for them in Contacts. To receive group calls made to a Talkgroup, you must join the Talkgroup. You can belong to only one Talkgroup at a time. When you join a new Talkgroup, you no longer belong to your previous Talkgroup. To join a Talkgroup:
1 Press #. Then enter the Talkgroup number using the keypad. -or-
Choose the Talkgroup name from Contacts or the recent calls list. 2 Press A under Join. Making Group Calls 1 Press #. Then enter the Talkgroup number using the keypad. -or-
Choose the Talkgroup name from Contacts or recent calls list. 2 Proceed as if making a Private call. Receiving Group Calls To answer a group call:
Proceed as if answering a Private call. Only one person at a time may speak on a group call. The Private ID or name of the person who is speaking will appear on the display below the Talkgroup number. Turning off Group Calls To control whether you hear group calls to your Talkgroup:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > 2-Way Radio > Tkgrp Silent. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Scroll to On if you dont want to hear group calls to your Talkgroup. -or-
Scroll to Off if you want to hear group calls to your Talkgroup. 4 Press A under Select. Note: There is an assignable ringer tone and a talk permit tone for Hub. Call Timers Call Timers Call timers measure the duration of your phone calls, Private or group calls, and circuit data use, as well as the number of Kilobytes sent and received by your phone:
Last Call displays the duration of your most recent phone call.
Phone Reset keeps a running total of your phone call minutes, until you reset it.
Phone Lifetime displays the total minutes of all your phone calls.
Prvt/Grp Reset keeps a running total of all of your Private and group call minutes, until you reset it.
Prvt/Grp Lifetime displays the total minutes of all your Private and group calls.
Circuit Reset keeps a running total of all of your circuit data use, until you reset it.
Circuit Lifetime displays the total minutes of all of your circuit data use.
Kbytes Reset keeps a running total of the number of Kilobytes sent and received by your phone, until you reset it. To view or reset a timer:
1 From the main menu, select Call Timers. 39 Additional Calling Options 2 Select the feature you want to view or reset. 3 To view a feature without resetting: Press A under Done when you are finished viewing.
-or-
To reset a feature: Press A under Reset. Press A under Yes to confirm. Note: The values displayed by Call Timers should not be used for billing. Call timers are estimates only. Using Your Phone as a Modem Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. To use your phone as a modem with a laptop, handheld device, or desktop computer:
1 Open the connector cover. connector cover 40 2 With the phones display facing up, insert a data cables connector into the accessory connector, until you hear a click. 3 Insert the data plug into the COM port of the other device. When used as a modem, your phone has these data transfer modes:
Circuit data used for sending and receiving faxes and for transferring large files
Packet data used for small file transfers such as email To use these services, you must install the iDEN Wireless Data Services software (available separately). For more information on setting up your computer and your i325 phone for packet and circuit data calls, refer to the Wireless Data Services Users Guide or contact your service provider. Making TTY Calls Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. To use your phone to make phone calls using a teletypewriter (TTY) device:
1 Connect one end of a 2.5mm cable into the audio jack on your phone. Connect the other end of the cable to your TTY device. 2 Make sure that your phones TTY feature is on and select the TTY mode you want to use. 3 Use your phone to enter phone numbers and make calls. When you make a TTY call, these icons appear on the phones display:
N Phone call is active. O Phone call is on hold. TTY device features such as Turbo-Code, High-Speed, and Interruption are not supported by your phone. These features must be turned off or disabled to use your TTY device with your phone. Making TTY Calls Turning On the TTY Feature Your phones TTY feature must be on if you want to make TTY calls, set the TTY mode, or change the TTY baud rate. To make sure the TTY feature is on:
From the main menu, select Settings > Phone Calls > TTY. This field must say On. Choosing a Mode Your phone supports these TTY modes:
TTY You type and read text on your TTY device.
VCO (Voice-Carry-Over) You speak into your phone and read text replies on your TTY device.
HCO (Hearing-Carry-Over) You type text on your TTY device and listen to voice replies on your phone speaker. To change mode while not in a call:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone Calls > TTY > Type. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Scroll to the TTY mode you want. 4 Press A under Select. When you make a TTY call, the call begins in the TTY mode you last selected. 41 2 Press A under Change 3 Scroll to the baud rate for your location. 4 Press A under Select. Additional Calling Options To change mode during a call using your phone:
1 Press m. 2 Select in Call Setup > TTY > Type. 3 Select the mode you want. To change mode during a call using your TTY device, issue one of the following commands:
VCO please to select VCO mode HCO please to select HCO mode HCO off please to turn off HCO mode Important: When you are using HCO, the sound coming from your phone speaker may be uncomfortably loud. Use caution when putting the phone to your ear.
(For information on setting the volume of your phone speaker, see Setting the Volume on page 105.) Changing the TTY Baud Rate By default, your phones TTY baud rate is set to 45.45, the baud rate required for TTY calls within the U.S. To make calls outside the U.S., set your TTY baud rate to 50.0. To change the TTY baud rate:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone Calls > TTY > Baud. 42
Memo Memo lets you store a number, make a call to that number, and save it to Contacts. To create a memo:
1 From the main menu, select Memo. 2 Enter the number using your keypad. 3 Press A under Store. To view the memo later:
1 From the main menu, select Memo. To delete the memo:
1 From the main menu, select Memo. 2 Press and hold A under Delete. 3 Press A under Store. To edit the memo:
1 From the main menu, select Memo. 2 Enter the new number. 3 Press A under Store. To make a call to the memo number:
1 From the main menu, select Memo. 2 Press s -or-
Press the PTT button. 3 To store the memo number to Contacts:
1 From the main menu, select Memo. 2 Press m. 3 Press A under Select. 4 To store the number as a new entry, select [New Contact]. -or-
To store the number to an existing entry, select the entry. 5 With the Contacts type field highlighted, scroll left or right to display the Contacts type you want to assign the number. 6 If you want to add more information to the entry, follow the applicable instructions in Creating Entries on page 27. 7 Press A under Done. 43 Ring Tones To set the ring tone your phone makes when you receive phone calls, message notifications, or call alerts:
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones. 2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off. 3 Scroll through the list of ring tones and select the one you want to assign. Vibrate sets your phone to vibrate instead of making a sound; Silent sets your phone to neither vibrate nor make a sound. Tip: Highlighting a ring tone lets you hear it. 4 Press A under Assign. 5 Scroll to the feature you want to assign the ring tone to. 6 Press A under Select. Tip: A checkmark next to a feature means the current ring tone has been assigned to it. To remove the assignment: Scroll to the feature. Press A under Select. 7 To assign the ring tone to other features, repeat step 5 through step 6. 8 When you are finished, press A under Done. 44 Setting Your Phone to Vibrate If your phone includes a vibrate feature, you can set your phone to vibrate when you receive phone calls, Private calls and group calls, messages notifications, or call alerts. Note: This is an optional feature. Contact your service provider about its availability for purchase. Turning Ring Tones Off You can set your phone to make no sound when you receive phone calls, Private calls and group calls, messages notifications, or call alerts. These icons indicate how the ringer is set. u The phone never rings. v The phone always vibrates instead of ringing. M The phone does not ring for phone calls. These icons may appear at the same time. Never Ring 1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones >
SilentAll. 2 Scroll left or right to set SilentAll to On. Always Vibrate Instead of Ringing If your phone includes a vibrate feature:
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones >
VibeAll. 2 Scroll left or right to set VibeAll to On. Tip: Pressing the volume controls to turn down the volume as far as possible sets VibeAll to On. Do Not Ring for Some Features To set individual ring options for phone calls, messages notifications, or call alerts:
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones. 2 Make sure VibeAll or SilentAll is set to Off. 3 Scroll through the list of ring tones to Silent. -or-
If your phone includes the vibrate feature, scroll through the list of ring tones to Vibrate. 4 Press A under Assign. 5 Scroll to the feature you want to set to make no sound. 6 Press A under Select. 7 To assign Vibrate or Silent to another feature, repeat step 5 through step 6. 8 When you are finished, press A under Done. Ring and Vibrate Note: To set ring options for Private calls and group calls, see Setting Your Phone to Not Ring on page 105. Ring and Vibrate To set your phone to ring and vibrate when you receive phone calls or call alerts:
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones. 2 Make sure VibeAll is set to Off. 3 Scroll through the list of ring tones and select the one you want to assign. 4 Press m. 5 Select Assign w/Vibe. 6 Select the feature you want to set to ring and vibrate. 7 When you are finished, press A under Done. This icon S appears on the display. Assigning Ring Tones to Contacts You can set the ring tone your phone makes when you receive phone calls or call alerts from someone you have stored in Contacts. 1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones. 2 Make sure VibeAll or SilentAll is set to Off. 45 Note: Ring tones may be downloaded only once. If you delete a ring tone from your phone, you must purchase it to download it again. Managing Memory To view the amount of memory available for custom ring tones:
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones. 2 Make sure VibeAll or SilentAll is set to Off. 3 Highlight any ring tone. 4 Press m. 5 Select Memory Usage. Deleting custom ring tones frees memory. Note: Ring tones are stored in your phone using the same memory space used to store voice records. Deleting voice records frees memory space for ring tones. Ring Tones 3 Scroll through the list of ring tones to the one you want to assign. Highlighting a ring tone lets you hear it. 4 Press A under Assign. 5 Select A Contact. 6 Scroll to the Contacts entry you want to assign the ring tone to. 7 Press A under Select. Viewing Ring Tone Assignments 1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones. 2 Make sure VibeAll or SilentAll is set to Off. 3 Highlight any ring tone. 4 Press m. 5 Select Overview. 6 Scroll to view ring tones assigned to features and Contact entries. Downloading More Ring Tones If you want to use other ring tones, you can download them into your phone for a fee. Go to www.motorola.com/idenupdate for a selection of custom ring tones and downloading instructions. 46 Deleting Custom Ring Tones Deleting Custom Ring Tones To delete a custom ring tone:
1 From the main menu, select Ring Tones. 2 Make sure VibeAll or SilentAll is set to Off. 3 Scroll to the ring tone you want to delete. 4 Press m. 5 Select Delete. 6 Press A under Yes to confirm. 47 Entering Text You can enter text into your phone using the traditional method of pressing a key several times for each character, or by pressing a key once for each letter while words likely to be the one you want are chosen from a database. You can also enter symbols and numbers into a text field. In screens that require you to enter text, you see the following icons near the top right corner. These icons tell you which text input mode you are using:
l Alpha Press a key several times for each character. j Word Press a key once for each letter while words likely to be the one you want are chosen from a database. i Symbols Enter punctuation and other symbols. k Numeric Enter numbers. When you access a screen that requires you to enter text, you start in Alpha mode. To choose a text input mode:
1 At a screen that requires you to enter text, press m. 48 2 A checkmark appears next to the current text input mode. Scroll to the text input mode you want to use. 3 Press A under Select. Using Alpha Mode
Press any key on the keypad to enter the letters, numbers, and symbols on that key. For example, to enter the letter Y, press 9 three times.
Type a letter then scroll up to make that letter uppercase, or type a letter then scroll down to make that letter lowercase.
See Special Function Keys on page 49 for more information on adding spaces, capitalization, and punctuation. Using Word Mode In Word mode, T9 Text Input analyzes the letters on the keypad button you press and arranges them to create words. As you type, T9 Text Input matches your keystrokes to words in its database and displays the most commonly used matching word. You can add you own words to this database. Entering a Word 1 Select Word as your text input mode. 2 Type a word by pressing one key for each letter. For example, to type test press 8 3 7 8. The displayed word may change as you type it. Do not try to correct the word as you go. Type to the end of the word before editing. 3 If the word that appears is not the desired word, press 0 to change the word on the display to the next most likely word in the database. Repeat until the desired word appears. If the desired word does not appear, you can add it to the database. Adding Words to the Database 1 Select Alpha as your text input mode. 2 Type the word using Alpha mode. 3 Select Word as your text input mode. 4 Press #. The word you typed in Alpha text entry mode is now in the database. Note: You cannot store alphanumeric combinations, such as Y2K. Special Function Keys Choosing a Language To change the language of the database:
1 At a screen that requires you to enter text, press m. 2 Select Languages. 3 Scroll to the language you want for your database. 4 Press A under Select. Special Function Keys Some of the phones keys assume different functions while in Alpha or Word mode. Spaces Press # for a space. Capitalization When you press and hold #, it acts as a 3-way toggle. Press and hold # to make the next letter typed uppercase (shift), to make all subsequent letters typed uppercase (caps lock), or to go back to lowercase letters. 49 Entering Text These icons appear in the top row of your display:
m Shift is on. n Caps lock is on. When neither of these icons appear, letters typed are lowercase. Note: Your phone automatically makes the first letter of a sentence uppercase. Punctuation Press 1 or 0 to insert punctuation. Continue to press the key to view the list of symbols available through that key. Pause to select the symbol you want. Using Symbols Mode 1 Select Symbols as your text input mode. A row of symbols appears along the bottom of your phones display. Scroll right to view the complete row. 2 Scroll left or right to choose the symbol you want to enter. 3 Press A under Select. Note: Additional punctuation symbols are available in Symbols mode. Using Numeric Mode 1 Select Numeric as your text input mode. 2 Press the number buttons on your keypad to enter numbers. 50 Advanced Features Note: All 4 features can be turned off as a package. Making Talkgroup or Hub Calls Talkgroup or Hub calls allow you to listen to up to 4 talkgroups (one primary and up to 3 secondary talkgroups equals a Hub). You can only initiate a call on the primary talkgroup but can respond to a call on any of the secondary talkgroups. Initiating a Group Call 1 Press and hold the PTT button to initiate a Hub call on your Primary Talkgroup. All phones that are affiliated with a Hub that has your Primary Talkgroup as either a Primary or Secondary Talkgroup will receive your group call if they are not already engaged in an active call. The first line of the display will indicate the Hub number or alias followed by Primary or Secondary Talkgroup. This can be assigned an alias. The third line of the display indicates the Private-ID of the unit initiating the group call, which can also be aliased. Note: Only valid if you have One Touch PTT enabled, otherwise you must affiliate with a group and then press the PTT. 1 Enter the #, then the Primary Talkgroup. 2 Press A under Join. 3 Press and hold the PTT button to initiate a group call. Hub Police Sunrise John Contcs Exit Status Icons Title Line 1 Line 2
Status Icons Hub-in-use and Scan icons (if scan is set
Title Hub ID or alias (for example, Police)
Line 1 Primary Talkgroup icon with Private ID or alias (for example, Sunrise), or secondary Talkgroup icon with Private ID or alias depending on which TalkGroup transmission is occurring
Line 2 Blank when transmitting; during reception shows transmitter's Private ID or alias
(for example, John) being received 51 Advanced Features Responding to a Secondary Talkgroup 1 To respond to a call on a Secondary Talkgroup, press the PTT button. Turning Scan On and Off 1 From Settings select DC/GC Options. Select Scan under On or Off. -or Press A to disable Scan. Note: When Scan is disabled, you will not be able to make or receive calls on your Secondary Talkgroups. Storing a Talkgroup or Hub in Contacts Although your service provider establishes the members of a Hub, you can store a Group or Hub in your Contacts. Emergency Group Call You can prioritize access to a specified Hub. This specific Hub is stored on the phones SIM card. The emergency Group call shall be initiated on the primary talkgroup of a pre-programmed Group when the [SPEAKER KEY GRAPHIC] is pressed and held for 3 seconds:
When the emergency button is pressed, the phone shall immediately provide access to the designated emergency Group. If the emergency button is pressed when the phone is transmitting or receiving (Private calls, including E911 calls or data transmit or receive, etc.), it shall immediately terminate or clear any ongoing activity or screen and provide access to the designated emergency Group. 52 Placing an Emergency Group Call You can prioritize access to your Hub by pressing and holding the emergency button. This will provide other members in the Hub visual and audible indications and convey that you are in an emergency. 1 Press and hold the [SPEAKER KEY GRAPHIC]
for 3 seconds. The phone will emit an emergency start to indicate that you have successfully requested an emergency call. 2 Press the PTT button to talk. The current Hub will be selected unless your Service Provider pre-programmed an emergency Hub number. If this is the case, the pre-programmed Emergency Hub will appear in the display. The Primary Talkgroup appears in the second line of the display. The third line is the PTT ID. Ending an Emergency Group Call Press and hold [SPEAKER KEY GRAPHIC] for 3 seconds. The phone will return to the last selected hub. The initiator cannot exit the emergency call without first cancelling the emergency call. Canceling an Emergency Group Call Press the [SPEAKER KEY GRAPHIC] until the phone generates an Emergency Call Cancel tone. The display will return to the non-emergency state. Emergency Group Call An emergency call will be cancelled if no talkgroup activity occurs for 30 seconds. The dispatcher, or any other person provisioned to cancel an emergency call can also cancel the emergency call. -or Press A to end. Receiving an Emergency Group Call When an emergency call is initiated, other members that have the Primary Talkgroup of the Emergency Hub as either a Primary or Secondary Talkgroup or their current affiliated Hub will be notified of an emergency condition. Other members of the Emergency Group Call can leave the emergency call while involved in the call. While listening to the emergency call, the Recipients phone will not receive phone calls, Call Alerts, Messages, Status Messages, Private Calls or other group calls for the duration of the emergency call. 53 Advanced Features Emergency
!
Electricians Adam John Contcs Exit Title Line 1 Line 2 Line 3
Title Emergency Hub icon with either Hub ID or alias (for example, Emergency)
Line 1 Talkgroup on which call was received:
If Primary Talkgroup, display icon with Talkgroup ID or alias; if secondary just display Private ID or alias
Line 2 Emergency hub call initiator icon with initiator's alias or Private ID
Line 3 Blank when transmitting; shows transmitter's Private ID or alias when receiving. When the transmitter is the emergency hub call initiator, the emergency hub call initiator icon shall appear before the name 54 Displaying Emergency Group Call in Recent Calls Emergency group calls will not display in Recent Calls either on the transmitting or the receiving phone. Displaying Emergency Group in Contacts The emergency Hub is programmed into your SIM card and when it is inserted in the phone it links the emergency Hub to the [SPEAKER KEY GRAPHIC]. The emergency Hub information will not display in Contacts by default. However, you can provide an alias and store it as a Hub in Contacts if the ID is known. Editing or deleting the emergency Hub stored in Contacts will have no effect on the information programmed in the SIM card. Emergency Group Call Icons An Emergency Group icon displays in front of the group alias or ID on the title line. An Emergency Initiator Icon displays next to the emergency group call initiators ID on phones receiving the emergency group call. Isolated Site Operation (ISO) ISO allows communication on the last selected Hub to continue within a single cell site when connectivity to the network is lost by allowing the cell to operate in a local, one cell only mode. The phone can place talkgroup calls - on the last selected Hub - until the ISO condition is cleared. Entering ISO The phone will enter the ISO state when its cell becomes isolated from the network, assuming the phone has no available neighbor cells. Placing an Emergency Group Call in ISO You cannot initiate an Emergency Group call while in ISO, regardless of whether or not it was the last Hub in use. If the phone goes into ISO during an Emergency Group Call, the call will be terminated. Using One-Touch PTT in ISO In ISO, the phone allows dispatch calls on the last active Hub. One-Touch PTT setting will be overridden in the following cases:
1 If One-Touch PTT setting was set to off before the phone went into ISO. Isolated Site Operation (ISO) 2 If the One-Touch PTT setting had a Group ID assigned to it and if it was not the last active group, when the phone went into ISO. 3 If the One-Touch PTT setting had a custom private ID (UFMI) assigned to it. Exiting ISO When the phone exits ISO and goes back on the network, the phone will emit the network service available tone.The display will return to the idle screen. Status Messages You can send a canned message to a selected phone. Status Messages are stored in your SIM card. Status Messages let you send a pre-programmed message to another phone. Up to ten pre-programmed alphanumeric Status Messages are available. Entering the Status Message Select an entry from one of the following:
Idle Screen
Contacts
Recent Calls
Call Alert Queue 55
Receiving a Status Message The phone will receive a message along with alert tones. To silence the recurring alert tones only, press any key or press A under Clear. If a non-aliased ID is sent, press A under Store to store the ID. Note: All calls remain blocked until this message is cleared. Advanced Features
Dialing 1 Press A under Alert. Youll see Ready to Alert on the display. 2 Press A under Select to select Status Messages. Youll see a list of messages left on your SIM. 3 Press A under Select to select the desired Message. Sending a Status Message Once youre in the Ready to Alert screen, press the PTT button to send a message. After selecting both a Status Message and a desired target ID, press the PTT button to send the message. Two high pitched tones will be heard during transmission. If successful, two high pitched tones will be heard to indicate the message was successfully delivered to the target phone. If unsuccessful, an alert tone will be heard to indicate that the targeted unit is busy, out-of-range, or turned-off. In either case, the phone will return to the status screen after 3 seconds. 56 Your Messaging Services Your phone lets you send and receive a variety of messages. Messaging services available to you depend on your service provider. Voice Mail All service providers offer voice mail message service. For information on accessing your voice mail messages, see Voice Mail Messages on page 61. Text Messages Your service provider may offer either of 2 options for sending text messages:
mobile originated text messages (MOSMS)
Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) To determine which text messaging option you have, view the message center:
Press A under Mesg. -or-
From the main menu, select Messages. Message Center Options for Phones with MOSMS If your service provider offers MOSMS, the following options appear in you message center:
Voice Mail access voice mail messages you have received.
Text Inbox access messages you have received.
Quick Notes access short, pre-written messages.
Text Outbox access messages you have created and sent. For information on using text messages if your service provider offers MOSMS, see MOSMS Messages on page 62. Message Center Options for Phones with MMS If your service provider offers MMS, the following options appear in you message center:
[Create Mesg] begin creating an MMS message.
Voice Mail access voice mail messages you have received. 57
Your Messaging Services Inbox access MMS messages you have received.
Drafts access MMS messages you have created and saved but not sent.
Sent Items access MMS messages you have created and sent.
SMS access Short Message Service (SMS) messages you have received
Depending on your service provider, you may also have a Net Alert option. For information on using text messages if your service provider offers MMS, see MMS Messages on page 68 and Other Text Messages for Phones with MMS on page 85. 58
Receiving Messages When you receive a voice mail message or text message, you have 2 ways to access the message:
Respond to the message notification that appears when the message is received.
Dismiss the message notification and access the message later through the message center. Message Notifications When you receive a message, your phone notifies you with text on the display and a notification tone or vibration. You can access the message or dismiss the notification. If you dismiss the notification, the message is not deleted. It can be accessed through the message center. If you are not on a phone call when you receive a message, your phone sounds a notification tone every 30 seconds until you access the message or dismiss the alert. When you are on a phone call, you can receive message notifications for all types of messages except MMS messages. For other types of messages, your phone may sound a notification tone during the call or after you end the call, depending on how you set your notification options. Setting Notification Options To control whether your phone sounds message notification tones while you are on phone calls:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Phone Calls > Notifications. 2 Choose the option you want:
Receive All Tones sound during calls for all types of messages except MMS messages.
Msg Mail Only Tones sound during calls for SMS messages; tones for all other types of messages are held until you end calls.
Delay All Tones for all types of messages are held until you end calls. 3 Press A under Select. Tip: To set notification options during a call:
Press m. Select In Call Setup >
Notifications. 59 Receiving Messages Message Center All your messages are stored in the message center. The message center shows how many messages you have of each type. To access your messages through the message center:
1 Press A under Mesg. -or-
From the main menu, select Messages. 2 Scroll to the type of message you want to access. 3 Press A under the display option on the left. 60 Sending Unanswered Calls to Voice Mail To send a phone call to voice mail instead of answering it:
Press e. -or-
Press A under No. If the caller leaves a message, this icon y appears on the display, reminding you that you have a new message. Voice Mail Messages Note: To receive voice mail messages, you must first set up a voice mail account with your service provider. Receiving a Message When you receive a voice mail message, New Voice Mail Message appears on the display. To call your service providers voice mail system and listen to the message:
Press A under Call. To dismiss the message notification:
Press A under Back. This icon y appears on the display, reminding you that you have a new message. Accessing Voice Mail from the Message Center 1 From the main menu, select Messages > Voice Mail. 2 Press A under Call to call your service providers voice mail system. 61 MOSMS Messages Note: If your text messaging service is not MOSMS, do not read this section. Read MMS Messages on page 68 and Other Text Messages for Phones with MMS on page 85. To determine your text messaging service, see Your Messaging Services on page 57. Your phone sends SMS messages using MOSMS. Your phone receives SMS messages from other phones that are using MOSMS. Setting Up Before you begin using MOSMS, you may need to set up your signature, service center number, and expiration information:
1 From the main menu, select Messages. 2 Scroll to Text Inbox. 3 Press m. 4 Select Text Msg Setup. 5 With the Signature field highlighted, press A under Change. Enter your signature. It may be up to 11 characters long. See Entering Text on page 48. When you are finished, press A under Ok. 62 6 With the Srvc Cntr No field highlighted, press A under Change. Enter the phone number of your service center. If you do not know this number, contact your service provider. When you are finished, press A under Ok. 7 With the Expire After field highlighted, press A under Change. This is the amount of time messages you send are saved if they cannot be delivered. After this period, they are discarded. Scroll or press A under Q to change field. When you are finished, press A under Done. 8 Press A under Back to save the information you entered. Receiving a Message When you receive a text message, New Text Message appears on the display. To view the message:
1 Press A under Read. 2 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll to read it. 3 To keep the message, scroll to the end of the message and press A under Save. -or-
To delete the message, scroll to the end of the message and press A under Delete. To dismiss the message notification:
Press A under Exit. This icon w appears on the display, reminding you that you have a new message. If your phone is powered off when you receive a text message, your phone notifies you the next time you power it on. If you are out of your coverage area, your phone alerts you when you return to your coverage area. Tip: While reading a text and numeric message that contains a phone number, you can press s to call that number. Reading from the Message Center 1 From the main menu, select Message > Text Inbox. 2 Scroll to the message you want to read. 3 Press A under Read. 4 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll to read it. Reading from the Message Center 5 To keep the message, press A under Save. -or-
To delete the message, scroll to the end of the message and press A under Delete. Tip: To see more choices, including replying to the message, press m. Creating and Sending Messages 1 From the main menu, select Messages > Text Inbox > [Create Msg]. -or-
From the main menu, select Messages > Text Outbox > [Create Msg]. 2 Press A under Create. 3 To address the message:
Use the keypad to enter the phone number of the person you want to send the message to.
-or-
Press A under Browse. Select Contacts, Recent Calls, or Memo. Enter the number from Contacts, the recent calls list, or Memo, as you would when making a call. When you are finished, press A under Ok. 4 Enter the text of the message. See Entering Text on page 48. -or-
63 MOSMS Messages To use a quick note: Press A under Browse. Scroll to the quick note you want. Press A under Select. For more information on quick notes, see Using Quick Notes on page 65. If you want to add your signature: Press m. Select Add Signature. When you are finished, press A under Ok. 5 If you want to send the message, press A under Yes. -or-
If you want to request confirmation of delivery, specify the type of message you want to send, save the message as a draft, or delete the message without sending it, press A under No. 6 If you want to request confirmation of delivery:
With the Report field highlighted, press A under Change. Select Yes. 7 If you want to specify the type of message you want to send:
With the Send As field highlighted, press A under Change. Scroll to the message type you want. Press A under Select. 8 To send the message: Press s. Press A under Yes. -or-
To save the message as a draft without sending it: Press m. Scroll to Save As Draft. Press A under Select. -or-
64 To delete the message without sending it: Press m. Scroll to Delete. Press A under Select. Tip: In some fields, you can select an option by scrolling left or right instead of pressing A under Change. Beginning Messages From the Recent Calls List 1 From the recent calls list, scroll to the name you want to send a message to. 2 If the entry has more than one phone number stored, view the phone number you want to send the message to. 3 Press m. 4 Select Compose SMS. The message is automatically addressed to the phone number you chose. 5 Follow step 4 through step 8 of Creating and Sending Messages on page 63. Beginning Messages From the Idle Screen 1 Using the keypad, enter the number you want to send a message to. 2 Press m. 3 Select Compose SMS. The message is automatically addressed to the phone number you chose. 4 Follow step 4 through step 8 of Creating and Sending Messages on page 63. Using Quick Notes Quick notes are short, pre-written text messages that you can create, edit, and send. You can store up to 20 quick notes. A quick note may be up to 30 characters long. To create a quick note:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Quick Notes > [New Quick Note]. 2 Press A under Create. Enter text. See Entering Text on page 48. -or-
To choose from pre-installed notes: Press A under Browse. Scroll to the note you want. Press A under Select. 3 Press A under Store. Tip: For more options, including sending the quick note, press m. Creating and Sending Messages Using Drafts When you save a message as a draft, it is saved in the drafts folder. You must have a draft saved to have a drafts folder. To edit a draft:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Drafts Folder. 2 Press A under Change. 3 To edit the fields you want to change, follow step 3 through step 8 in Creating and Sending Messages on page 63. If you have a draft saved, you can create more drafts in the drafts folder:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Drafts Folder > [Create Msg]. 2 Press A under Create. 3 Follow step 3 through step 7 in Creating and Sending Messages on page 63. 4 Scroll to Save As Draft. Using the Outbox Messages you have sent are stored in the outbox. 65 MOSMS Messages These icons appear next to messages in the outbox:
5 Sent and confirmed. 9 Send attempted. 0 Forwarded. 4 Received by addressee. 6 Not received by addressee. 8 Send failed. 7 Re-sent. Locked. R Resending Messages To resend a message:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Text Outbox. 2 Scroll to the message you want to resend. 3 Press m. 4 Select Re-send. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. 66 Deleting Sent Messages To delete a sent message:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Text Outbox. 2 Scroll to the message you want to delete. 3 Press m. 4 Select Delete. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. To delete all unlocked sent messages:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Text Outbox. 2 Press m. 3 Select Delete All. 4 Press A under Yes to confirm. Locking Sent Messages When you lock a message, it cannot be deleted until you unlock it. 1 From the main menu, select Messages > Text Outbox. 2 Scroll to the message you want to lock or unlock. 3 Press m. 4 Scroll to Lock to lock the message. -or-
Scroll to Unlock to unlock the message. 3 Select Memory Meter. Managing Memory 5 Press A under Select. Managing Memory Your text inbox, outbox, and drafts folder have a set amount of memory available for storing messages. The text inbox holds 20 messages. If the text inbox is full, you cannot receive messages until you delete some. The outbox and drafts folder share memory space. Together they can hold 30 messages. If the outbox and drafts folder memory is full, you cannot send messages or save drafts until you delete some. To view the amount of memory available in your text inbox:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Text Inbox. 2 Press m. 3 Select Memory Meter. To view the amount of memory available in your outbox and drafts folder:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Text Outbox. 2 Press m. 67 MMS Messages Note: If your text messaging service is not MMS, do not read this section. Read MOSMS Messages on page 62 instead.To determine your text messaging service, see Your Messaging Services on page 57. Multimedia Messaging Service (MMS) lets you send and receive text messages. MMS messages may include attached audio files. Navigating the Inbox, Drafts, and Sent Items You can access MMS messages through the following options in the message center:
Inbox MMS messages you have received
Drafts MMS messages you have created and saved but not sent
Sent Items MMS messages you have created and sent The messages in the Inbox, Drafts, and Sent Items are grouped in pages of 9 messages. Scroll to view the messages on a page. 68 To go to the next page:
Scroll right. -or-
Press #. -or-
Scroll to the end of the page and select MORE. To go to the previous page:
Scroll left. -or-
Press *. To open a message on the current page:
Scroll to the message you want to open. Then press A under the display option on the left.
-or-
Press the number on the keypad corresponding to the number of the message. Attached Audio Files You can send and received audio files with MMS messages. Sending When you send a message, you can attach a ring tone from your list of ring tones.
When you receive your phone, all musical ring tones in the list of ring tones can be included in a message. However, some ring tones you download to your phone may not be in the required format to be included in a message. Ring tones that you download to your phone or receive in a message may be forward locked, meaning they cannot be included in a message. The non-musical ring tones in the list of ring tones when you receive your phone cannot be included in a message. Receiving When you receive a message with a audio file attached, you can play the audio file, save it, or delete it. See Playing, Saving, and Deleting Attached Audio Files on page 81. Creating and Sending Messages Each message you create may contain the following fields:
To the phone numbers or email addresses of one or more recipients
Mesg the body of the message
Subject the subject line Creating and Sending Messages
Attach an attached ring tone
Cc the phone numbers or email addresses of more recipients
Priority sets the priority of the message to normal or high.
Report lets you receive a report confirming that your message was delivered.
Valid Until If the message has not been delivered after this date, no more delivery attempts are made. To send a message, you must address it to at least one recipient. All other message fields are optional. You can fill in the message fields in any order. Entering Text In message fields that require you to enter text, you can begin entering the text from the keypad instead of pressing A under Change. While entering text, you can always choose a text input mode from the context-sensitive menu. For information on ways to enter text from the keypad, see Entering Text on page 48. 69 MMS Messages Message Size You can create and send messages of up to 2 KB, not including an attached audio recording. An attached audio recording may be up to 10 KB. To see the size of a message you are creating:
1 Scroll to any field in the message. 2 Press m. 3 Select Message Size. Sending or Canceling To send the message at any time after it has been addressed:
Press A under Send. -or-
If Send is not one of your options: Press m. Select Send. To cancel the message at any time:
At the message screen, press A under Cancel.
-or-
Press e to cancel the message and save it in Drafts. Sending a Basic Message 1 To begin creating a message:
From the main menu, select Messages. With
[Create Mesg] highlighted, press A under Create. -or-
Select Inbox, Drafts, or Sent Items. With
[Create Mesg] highlighted, press A under Create. -or-
Begin creating a message from Contacts, the recent calls list, or the idle screen. See More Ways to Begin a Message on page 73. -or-
Reply to a received message. See Replying to a Message on page 72. 2 To address the message:
With To highlighted, press A under Change. Enter the phone number or email address from the keypad and press A under Done. Repeat this action to enter more phone numbers or email addresses. -or-
Select recipients from Contacts or the recent calls list. See More Ways to Address a Message on page 74. 70 Tip: To remove a phone number or email address from the list of message recipients:
Scroll to phone number or email address you want to remove. Press m. Select Remove. When you are finished addressing the message, press A under Done. 3 To enter or edit the body of the message:
With Mesg highlighted, press A under Change. Note: If you have created a signature, the signature automatically appears in this field. Text you enter appears before your signature. See Customizing MMS on page 81. Enter text from the keypad. -or-
Use a Quick Note. See Quick Notes on page 75. When you are finished, press A under Done. 4 If you want to send the message now, press A under Send. -or-
Continue creating your message. See Adding More Message Options. Creating and Sending Messages Adding More Message Options 1 To view more message fields, select MORE. 2 If you want to create or edit the subject line:
With Subject highlighted, press A under Change. Enter text from the keypad. -or-
Select a Quick Note. See Quick Notes on page 75. When you are finished, press A under Done. 3 If you want to attach a ring tone:
With Attach highlighted, press A under Change. A list of ring tones that can be included in a message appears. Select the ring tone you want to attach. Tip: To remove a ring tone you attached, select
[No Ring Tone]. 4 If you want to add more recipients in addition to those in the To field:
With Cc highlighted, press A under Change. Enter the phone number or email address from the keypad and press A under Done. Repeat this action to enter more phone numbers or email addresses. -or-
71 MMS Messages Select recipients from Contacts or the recent calls list. See More Ways to Address a Message on page 74. When you are finished addressing the message, press A under Done. 5 If you want to set the priority of the message:
With Priority highlighted, press A under Change. Select the priority you want. 6 If you want to receive a report confirming that your message was delivered:
With Report highlighted, press A under Change. Select On Delivery. 7 If you want to set a date after which attempts to deliver the message end:
With Valid Until highlighted, press A under Change. Select a date by scrolling or entering numbers. 8 To send the message, press A under Send. Replying to a Message You can reply to a received message while you are viewing it. If you have already viewed a message, you can also reply to it while it is highlighted in the Inbox. You cannot reply to unread messages. 72 For information on viewing received messages, see Receiving a Message and Viewing Received Messages from the Message Center on page 77. When you reply to a message you received, some of the fields in your reply message are filled in automatically:
To the phone number or email address of the sender of the message you are replying to. If you are sending a reply to all, some recipients may be in this field.
Mesg the first 40 characters of the message you are replying to. Text you add to the body of your message appears above this.
Subject Re: followed by the subject line of the message you are replying to, if any.
Cc If you are sending a reply to all, some recipients may be in this field. To reply to a message:
1 View the message you want to reply to. -or-
If you have already viewed the message, scroll to it. 2 Press m. 3 To reply to the sender only, select Reply. -or-
To reply to the sender and all recipients, select Reply All. 4 A list of words and short phrases is displayed. Select any of these phrases to add it to the body of your messages. -or-
Select [Create Reply] to begin the body of your message without using any of these phrases. 5 Edit any message fields you want to change. 6 Send the message. Tip: To create new reply phrases to use in later reply messages, see Customizing MMS on page 81. More Ways to Begin a Message In addition to beginning a message from the message center, you can begin a message from Contacts, the recent calls list, or the idle screen. From Contacts 1 From the Contacts list, scroll to the entry containing the phone number or email address you want to send the message to. 2 Scroll left or right to view the Contacts types until you see the icon for the phone number or email address you want to send the message to. 3 Press A under Create. -or-
If Create is not one of your options: Press m. Select Create Mesg. Creating and Sending Messages 4 Create and send the message. The message is automatically addressed to the phone number or email address you chose. From the Recent Calls List 1 From the recent calls list, scroll to the entry you want to send a message to. 2 If the entry has more than one phone number stored, view the phone number you want to send the message to. 3 Press A under Create. -or-
If Create is not one of your options: Press m. Select Create Mesg. 4 Create and send the message. The message is automatically addressed to the phone number you chose. From the Idle Screen 1 Using the keypad, enter the number you want to send a message to. 2 Press m. 3 Select Create Mesg. The message is automatically addressed to the phone number you chose. 73 MMS Messages More Ways to Address a Message When you are filling in the To and Cc message fields, you can select recipients from Contacts and the recent calls list. You can select more than one recipient from Contacts and the recent calls list. A checkmark appears next to each selected item. Tip: To deselect a selected item: Scroll to a selected item. Press A under Deselect. From Contacts When you select recipients from Contacts, Contacts entries containing phone numbers or email addresses are displayed. You can search for an entry name as you would when viewing Contacts otherwise. See Searching for a Name on page 26. 1 With To or Cc highlighted: Press m. Select Contacts. 2 Select the entry containing the phone number or email address you want to send the message to. 3 If the entry contains more than one phone number or email address, select the ones you want to send the message to. When you are finished selecting items within the entry, press A under Done. 74 4 When you are finished selecting entries, press A under Done. 5 Create and send the message. The message is automatically addressed to the phone numbers and email addresses you chose. From the Recent Calls List When you select recipients from the recent calls list, phone calls are displayed. Private calls are displayed only if the Private ID is stored in Contacts and its Contacts entry also contains a phone number or email address. 1 With To or Cc highlighted: Press m. Select Recent Calls. 2 Select the entry containing the phone number or email address you want to send the message to. 3 If the entry contains more than one phone number or email address, select the ones you want to send the message to. When you are finished selecting items within the entry, press A under Done. 4 When you are finished selecting entries, press A under Done. 5 Create and send the message. The message is automatically addressed to the phone numbers and email addresses you chose. Quick Notes When you are filling in the Mesg and Subject message fields, you can add ready-made words or short phrases called Quick Notes. After you add these words or phrases, you can edit them as you would any other text. 1 With Mesg or Subject highlighted:
Press A under QNotes. -or-
If QNotes is not one of your options: Press m. Select Quick Notes. 2 Select the Quick Note you want to insert into the message. Tip: To create new Quick Notes to use in later messages, see Customizing MMS on page 81. Drafts When you are creating a message, you can save it in Drafts any time before you send it. You can view, edit, send, or delete saved drafts. Saving a Message in Drafts 1 While you are creating a message, press m. 2 Select Save in Drafts. Drafts You can continue to create the message. The version you saved in Drafts will not change. Sending a Draft 1 From the main menu, select Messages >
Drafts. 2 Scroll to the draft you want to send. 3 Press m. 4 Select Send. Editing a Draft 1 From the main menu, select Messages >
Drafts. 2 Scroll to the draft you want to edit. 3 Press A under Edit. 4 Continue as you would when creating a message. Deleting When you send a draft, it is deleted from Drafts. To delete a message in Drafts without sending it:
1 Scroll to the message you want to delete. 2 Press m. 3 Select Delete Message. 4 Press A under Yes to confirm. 75 MMS Messages Drafts Icons
# Draft. z High priority.
! Attachment. y High priority with an attachment. Sent Items Messages you have sent or tried to send are stored in Sent Items. Forwarding Sent Items 1 From the main menu, select Messages > Sent Items. 2 Scroll to the message you want to forward. 3 Press m. 4 Select Forward. 5 Create and send your message. Resending If a message was not successfully sent, you can resend it. 1 From the main menu, select Messages > Sent Items. 76 2 Scroll to the message you want to resend. 3 Press m. 4 Select Resend. Note: If your message was sent successfully, Resend will not appear as an option. Checking Delivery Status If a message was successfully sent and you set the message to give a report confirming delivery, you can check the delivery status:
1 From the main menu, select Messages > Sent Items. 2 Scroll to the message you want to view. 3 Press m. 4 Select Delivery Status. Deleting 1 Scroll to the message you want to delete. -or-
View the message you want to delete. 2 Press m. 3 Select Delete Message. 4 Press A under Yes to confirm. Sent Items Icons O Successfully sent.
[ Unsuccessfully sent. z High priority. Attachment.
!
y High priority with an attachment. Receiving a Message When you receive an MMS message, a message notification appears on the display. To view the message:
1 Press A under the display option on the left. The message is downloaded from the message server. 2 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll to read it. 3 To exit the message without deleting it, press A under Back. To dismiss the message notification:
Press A under display option on the right. This icon w appears on the display, reminding you that you have a new message. Receiving a Message Viewing Received Messages from the Message Center 1 From the main menu, select Messages > Inbox. 2 Scroll to the message you want to view. 3 Press A under Read. If you have not viewed the message before, the message is downloaded from the message server. 4 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll to read it. 5 To exit the message without deleting it, press A under Back. Inbox Icons T Unread message. M Read message. N Reply sent.
$ Forwarded.
& Locked. z High priority. Attachment.
!
77 MMS Messages
% Locked, with an attachment. L High priority and locked. y High priority with an attachment.
] High priority and locked, with an attachment. Actions for Received Messages Deleting 1 Scroll to the message you want to delete. -or-
View the message you want to delete. 2 Press m. 3 Select Delete Message. 4 Press A under Yes to confirm. Replying See Replying to a Message on page 72. Forwarding 1 View the message you want to forward. -or-
If you have already viewed the message, scroll to it. 2 Press m. 78 3 Select Forward. 4 Create and send your message. Locking and Unlocking When you lock a message, it cannot be deleted until you unlock it. 1 View the message you want to lock or unlock.
-or-
If you have already viewed the message, scroll to it. 2 Press m. 3 Select Lock Message or Unlock Message. Calling a Number in a Message If a message you receive contains a phone number, Private ID, or Talkgroup ID, you can call or send a call alert to that number. Making a Phone Call 1 View the message. 2 Press m. 3 Select Call # In Message. 4 If the message contains more than one phone number, scroll to the number you want to call. 5 Press s. Making a Private Call 1 View the message. 2 Highlight the Private ID you want to call. 3 If the message contains more than one Private ID, scroll to the Private ID you want to call. 4 Press the PTT button. Sending a Call Alert 1 View the message. 2 Press m. 3 Select Alert. 4 If the message contains more than one Private ID, scroll to the Private ID you want to alert. 5 Press the PTT button. Making a Group Call 1 View the message. 2 Press m. 3 Select Talkgroup. 4 If the message contains more than one Talkgroup number, scroll to the Talkgroup number you want to call. 5 Press the PTT button. Actions for Received Messages Storing Message Information To Contacts You can save sender information and information contained in the message to Contacts. Saving Sender Information If the message was sent from a phone, you can save the senders phone number to Contacts. If the message was sent using email, you can save the senders email address to Contacts. 1 View the message. 2 Press m. 3 Select Save Sender # or Save Sender Email. 4 To store the number as a new entry, select [New Contact]. -or-
To store the number to an existing entry, select the entry. 5 If you are saving a phone number:
Scroll to the Contacts type field. Scroll left or right to display the Contacts type you want to assign the number. 6 If you want to add more information to the entry, follow the applicable instructions in Creating Entries on page 27. 7 Press A under Done. 79 MMS Messages Storing Numbers from the Message If a message you receive contains a phone number, Private ID, or Talkgroup ID, you can store these numbers to Contacts. 1 View the message. 2 Press m. 3 Select Save Number in Message. 4 If the message contains more than one number, scroll to the number you want to store. 5 To store the number as a new entry, select [New Contact]. -or-
To store the number to an existing entry, select the entry. 6 With the Contacts type field highlighted, scroll left or right to display the Contacts type you want to assign the number. 7 If you want to add more information to the entry, follow the applicable instructions in Creating Entries on page 27. 8 Press A under Done. Storing Email Addresses from the Message If a message you receive contains one or more email addresses, you can store these addresses to Contacts. 1 View the message. 80 2 Press m. 3 Select Save Email in Message. 4 If the message contains more than one email address, scroll to the address you want to store. 5 To store the number as a new entry, select [New Contact]. -or-
To store the number to an existing entry, select the entry. 6 If you want to add more information to the entry, follow the applicable instructions in Creating Entries on page 27. 7 Press A under Done. Going to a Website If a message contains one or more website URLs, you can go to the website. 1 View the message. 2 Press m. 3 Select Go to Website. 4 If the message contains more than one website URL, scroll to the website URL you want to go to. Playing, Saving, and Deleting Attached Audio Files Playing To play an audio file attached to a message:
1 View the message. 2 Press m. 3 Select Play Audio. Audio files in messages do not play if VibeAll is set to On. Saving To save an attached audio file to the list of ring tones:
1 View the message. 2 Press m. 3 Select Save Audio. Deleting To delete an audio file from a message:
1 View the message. 2 Press m. 3 Select Delete Audio. 4 Press A under Yes to confirm. Customizing MMS Customizing MMS The Setup menu lets you customize MMS for your phone:
Friendly Name Enter text here to create a friendly name. Your friendly name is the name displayed in the From field on other iDEN phones when they receive messages from you.
Signature Enter text here to create a signature. Your signature is text that is automatically inserted at the end of all messages you create. You can edit the text before sending the message.
Quick Notes lets you create new Quick Notes and edit or delete Quick Notes you have created. See New Quick Notes and Reply Phrases on page 82.
Replies lets you create new reply phrases and edit or delete reply phrases you have created. See New Quick Notes and Reply Phrases on page 82.
Cleanup controls how long messages remain in the Inbox and Sent Items before they are deleted. See Setting the Clean-up Option To access the Setup menu:
1 From the main menu, select Messages. 2 With [Create Mesg] highlighted, press m. 81 MMS Messages 3 Select Setup. Tip: This option is available from many context-sensitive menus when you are using MMS. New Quick Notes and Reply Phrases Creating 1 From the Setup menu, select Quick Notes or Replies. 2 Select [New QNote] or [New Reply]. 3 Entry text from the keypad. 4 When you are finished, press A under Ok. Editing You can edit only Quick Notes and reply phrases you have created. 1 From the Setup menu, select Quick Notes or Replies. 2 Scroll to the Quick Note or reply phrase you want to edit. 3 Edit the text. 4 When you are finished, press A under Ok. Deleting You can delete only Quick Notes and reply phrases you have created. 82 To delete a Quick Note or reply phrase:
1 From the Setup menu, select Quick Notes or Replies. 2 Scroll to the Quick Note or reply phrase you want to delete. 3 Press m. 4 Select Delete. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. To delete all Quick Note or all reply phrase:
1 From the Setup menu, select Quick Notes or Replies. 2 Press m. 3 Select Delete All. 4 Press A under Yes to confirm. Setting the Clean-up Option The clean-up option controls how long messages remain in the Inbox and Sent Items before they are deleted. You set the clean-up option for the Inbox and Sent Items separately. The clean-up option deletes only read, unlocked messages. Clean-Up Options
Off messages are never automatically deleted.
5 Messages If you have more than 5 messages, messages are deleted in the order they were received, starting with the oldest, until 5 are left.
10 Messages If you have more than 10 messages, messages are deleted in the order they were received, starting with the oldest, until 10 are left.
1 Day Messages are deleted if they are older than 1 day.
3 Days Messages are deleted if they are older than 3 days.
Custom Lets you create a clean-up option of up to 99 messages or 99 days. For the Inbox 1 From the Cleanup menu, select Inbox. 2 Choose a clean-up option. 3 To automatically delete messages now, select Yes. -or-
To delete messages later, select No. For Sent Items 1 From the Cleanup menu, select Sent Items. Managing Memory 2 Choose a clean-up option. 3 To automatically delete messages now, press A under Yes. -or-
To delete messages later, press A under No. Choosing to Delete Messages Later If you choose to delete messages later, rather than at the time you set the clean-up option, the type of clean-up option you set determines when messages are deleted. If you set an option that cleans up messages according to how many you have, messages are deleted when you exit the message center after setting the option. If you set an option that cleans up messages according to how old the messages are, messages are deleted when you power on your phone. Managing Memory All items in the Inbox, Drafts, and Sent Items share the same memory space. Note: The content of a message in the Inbox is not stored in your phones memory until the message is read. Unread messages use very little memory. 83 MMS Messages To view your used memory, free memory, and memory capacity:
1 From the main menu, select Messages. 2 With [Create Mesg] highlighted, press m. 3 Select Setup > Memory Size. Tip: This option is available from many context-sensitive menus when you are using MMS. To free more memory, delete messages. To delete all messages at once, see Deleting All Messages. To set messages to be deleted automatically, see Setting the Clean-up Option on page 82. Deleting All Messages To delete all read, unlocked messages from the Inbox, all messages in Drafts, or all successfully sent messages in Sent Items:
1 Scroll to Inbox, Draft, or Sent Items. 2 Press m. 3 Select Delete All. 4 Press A under Yes to confirm. Tip: This option is available from many context-sensitive menus when you are using MMS. 84 Other Text Messages for Phones with MMS Note: If your text messaging service is not MMS, do not read this section. Read MOSMS Messages on page 62 instead.To determine your text messaging service, see Your Messaging Services on page 57. If you service provider offers MMS, your phone also receives SMS messages and a receive Net alerts. SMS Messages SMS messages are short text messages. Your phone receives SMS messages, but does not send SMS messages. Receiving a Message When you receive a text and numeric message, New Text Message appears on the display. To view the message:
1 Press A under Read. 2 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll to read it. 3 To keep the message, scroll to the end of the message and press A under Save. -or-
To delete the message, scroll to the end of the message and press A under Delete. To dismiss the message notification:
Press A under Back. This icon w appears on the display, reminding you that you have a new message. Reading from the Message Center 1 From the main menu, select Messages > SMS. 2 Scroll to the message you want to read. 3 Press A under Read. 4 If the message fills more than one screen, scroll to read it. 5 To keep the message, scroll to the end of the message and press A under Save. -or-
To delete the message, scroll to the end of the message and press A under Delete. Calling and Storing Numbers If an SMS message you receive contains a phone number, you can call that number by pressing s while viewing the message. 85 Other Text Messages for Phones with MMS If an SMS message you receive contains a phone number, Private ID, or Talkgroup ID, you can call or send a call alert to that number, or store that number to Contacts. Press m while viewing the message to access these options. Net Alerts Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. When you receive a browser message, your phone notifies you with a Net alert. Each Net alert lets you view the browser message associated with it. If you dismiss the notification, this icon w appears on the display, reminding you that you have a new message. 86 Java Applications Your phone arrives with Java applications installed and ready to run. You can download and install more Java applications. Note: Using Java applications may cause your phone to use up more battery power than other uses of your phone. Running Applications To run an application that has a shortcut on the main menu:
1 From the main menu, select the application or suite of applications you want to run. 2 If you have selected a suite of applications, select the application you want to run. To run an application that does not have a shortcut on the main menu:
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps. 2 Select the application or suite of applications you want to run. 3 If you have selected a suite of applications, select the application you want to run. Tip: If you dont hear the sounds associated with the Java application, select Settings >
Volume and check the volumes of Java Speaker and Java Earpiece. Suspending Applications When you suspend an application, it does not stop running. It goes to the background so that you can run another application in the foreground. To suspend an application:
Press e or close the flip. To view your suspended applications:
From the Java menu, select Suspended Apps. You can have up to 3 applications running at one time 1 running in the foreground and 2 in the background. Resuming Applications You can resume a suspended application at any time. This brings it to the foreground. 1 From the Java menu, select Suspended Apps. 2 Select the application you want to resume. 87 Java Applications Ending Applications To end an application:
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps. 2 If the application you want to end is part of a suite of applications, select the suite. 3 Scroll to the application you want to end. 4 Press A under End. To end all applications:
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps. 2 Scroll to Suspended Apps. 3 Press m. 4 Select End All. 5 If you want to end all applications without letting them exit, press A under EndNow. Tip: You can also end applications from the Suspended Apps screen. Downloading Applications If you want to run more Java applications, you can download them into your phone. Go to www.motorola.com/idenupdate for a selection of Java applications and downloading instructions. 88 Installing Applications Before running most applications you have downloaded, you must install them. 1 From the main menu, select Java Apps. 2 Select the application or suite of applications you want to install. Installation messages appear as the application installs. 3 If you want to create a shortcut to the Java application on the main menu: Press A under Next. Press A under Yes. -or-
If you do not want to create a shortcut, press A under Done. 4 Press A under OK. 5 Press A under Done. Deleting Applications To delete an application:
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps. 2 Scroll to the application you want to delete. 3 Press m. 4 Select Deinstall. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. 6 When your phone has finished deleting the application, press A under Done. To delete all Java applications:
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps. 2 Scroll to Java System. 3 Press m. 4 Select Delete All. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. Managing Memory To view the amount of memory available for Java applications:
1 From the main menu, select Java Apps > Java System. 2 Press A under Next. 3 To see more memory information, press A under Next again. Deleting Java applications frees memory. Note: Java application data is stored in your phone using the same memory space used to store voice records, and ring tones. Deleting some of these other items frees memory space for Java applications. Managing Memory Shortcuts on the Main Menu When you install an application, you can create a shortcut to the application on the main menu. To create a shortcut to an application that is already installed:
1 From the main menu, select Settings >
Personalize > Menu Options > Add/Remove Apps. -or-
From the main menu: Press m. Select Main Menu Setup > Add/Remove Apps. 2 Scroll to view the list of Java applications. Any application that has a shortcut on the main menu has a checkmark next to it. 3 Scroll to the application you want to create a shortcut for. 4 Press A under OK. 5 Press A under Done. To remove a shortcut:
1 From the main menu, select Settings >
Personalize > Menu Options > Add/Remove Apps. -or-
From the main menu: Press m. Select Main Menu Setup > Add/Remove Apps. 89 Java Applications 2 Scroll to view the list of Java applications. Any application that has a shortcut on the main menu has a checkmark next to it. 3 Scroll to the application you want to remove the shortcut for. 4 Press A under OK. 5 Press A under Done. Java Applications and GPS Enabled Some Java applications can make use of your phones GPS feature to determine the approximate geographical location of your phone. (See GPS Enabled on page 93 for more information on the GPS feature.) However, for privacy reasons, you may not always want Java applications to access the location of your phone. Your phone protects your privacy by giving you the option to block all or some Java applications from accessing the location of your phone. Setting Privacy for All Java Applications These options control the privacy of all Java applications on your phone:
90
Restricted No Java or similar software applications may access the location of your phone. However, location information may still be available to the phones owner, fleet manager, or account administrator.
Unrestricted All Java applications may access the location of your phone, without notifying you.
By Permission When a Java application attempts to access the location of your phone, you are prompted to give permission. However, location information may still be available to the phones owner, fleet manager, or account administrator. See Setting Privacy Options on page 98 for information on choosing these options. Granting or Denying Permission If you choose By Permission, you must grant or deny each Java application access to the location of your phone when the application requests access for the first time. You may be required to grant or deny subsequent requests from the same application, depending on the privacy setting you choose for the individual Java application (see Setting Privacy for Each Java Application on page 91). When a Java application requests access to the location of your phone, a screen appears informing you. To deny this request:
1 Press A under Deny. The application does not access the location of your phone. 2 Select the denying option you want:
Always If the application requests access to the location of your phone again, the request is denied without notifying you.
For this session If the application requests access to the location of your phone again before you power off your phone, the request is denied without notifying you.
Only Once If the application requests access to the location of your phone again, you are prompted to grant or deny permission. To grant this request:
1 Press A under Grant. The application accesses your phones location. 2 Select the granting option you want:
Always If the application requests access to the location of your phone again, the request is granted without notifying you. Java Applications and GPS Enabled
For this session If the application requests access to the location of your phone again before you power off your phone, the request is granted without notifying you.
Only Once If the application requests access to the location of your phone again, you are prompted to grant or deny permission. Setting Privacy for Each Java Application After a given Java application requests access to the location of your phone for the first time, you have the opportunity to set the GPS privacy option for that Java application. 1 From the main menu, select Java Apps. 2 Scroll to the application or suite of applications you want to set the privacy option for. If the application has requested access to the location of your phone, m appears when you highlight the application. 3 Press m. 4 Select Permissions. 5 Select the privacy option you want for this application:
91 Java Applications
Always The application always has permission to access the location of your phone, without notifying you.
Ask When the application requests access to the location of your phone, you are prompted to grant or deny permission (see Granting or Denying Permission on page 90).
Never When the application requests access to the location of your phone, the request is denied without notifying you. 92 GPS Enabled Your phones GPS Enabled feature uses information from Global Positioning System (GPS) satellites orbiting the Earth to determine the approximate geographical location of your phone, expressed as latitude and longitude. The availability and accuracy of this location information (and the amount of time that it takes to calculate it) will vary depending on the environment in which you are using the GPS feature. For example, GPS location fixes are often difficult to obtain indoors, in covered locations, between high buildings, or in other situations where you have not established a clear broad view of the sky. SEE:
IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind. When you make a 911 emergency call, the GPS feature of your phone can help emergency personnel locate you if your phone has adequate access to GPS satellite signals and your emergency response center is equipped to process such information. You can also use the GPS feature to view your approximate location. Location information appears on the phones display. If your phone is connected to a laptop computer or similar device, software running on that device can request your location. To protect your privacy, you can control whether these requests are granted. IMPORTANT: Things to Keep in Mind If you are using the GPS feature of your phone while driving, please give full attention to driving and to the road. Where adequate signals from multiple satellites are not available (usually because your GPS antenna cannot establish a view of a wide area of open sky), the GPS feature of your phone WILL NOT WORK. Such situations include but are not limited to:
In underground locations Inside of buildings, trains, or other covered vehicles
Under any other metal or concrete roof or structure
Between tall buildings or under dense tree-cover
Near a powerful radio or television tower 93
GPS Enabled
When your GPS antenna is covered (for example, by your hand or other object) or facing the ground In temperature extremes outside the operating limits of your phone Walking or driving very slowly may also substantially reduce GPS performance. Even where location information can be calculated in such situations, it may take much longer to do so, and your location estimate may not be as accurate. Therefore, in any 911 call, always report the location to the emergency response center if you can and if you cannot, remain on your phone for as long as the emergency response center instructs you. Even where adequate signals from multiple satellites are available, your GPS feature will only provide an approximate location, often within 150 feet (45 meters) but sometimes much further from your actual location. Advice on how to improve GPS performance is provided in Enhancing GPS Performance on page 96. While the GPS feature of your phone can be a valuable navigational aid, it does not replace the need for careful navigating and good judgment. Never rely solely on one device for navigation. Remember that the accuracy of the location 94 information and the time needed to obtain it will vary depending on circumstances, particularly the ability to receive signals from adequate numbers of satellites. On emergency calls, your phone uses assistance information from the phone network to improve the speed and accuracy of your phones location calculation: if such assistance information becomes unavailable, it may reduce the speed and accuracy of the location calculation. The satellites used by the GPS feature of your phone are controlled by the U.S. government and are subject to changes implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense GPS user policy and the Federal Radionavigation Plan. These changes may affect the performance of the GPS feature of your phone. Making an Emergency Call Dial 911 to be connected to an emergency response center. If you are on an active call, you must end it before calling 911. When you make an emergency 911 call, the GPS feature of your phone begins to seek information to calculate your approximate location. It will take the GPS feature of your phone some time to determine your approximate location. Even where your phone has good access to sufficient
GPS satellite signals and network assist data, it may take 30 seconds or more to determine the approximate location. This time will increase where there is reduced access to satellite signals. When your approximate location is determined, it is made available to the appropriate emergency response center. In some cases, your local 911 emergency response center may not be equipped to receive GPS location information. For this reason, and because the GPS location information reported is only approximate or may not be available in your location (see IMPORTANT:
Things to Keep in Mind on page 93), always report your location to the 911 operator you speak to when making an emergency call, if able, just as you would when using a phone without GPS capabilities. Note: If you are concerned about whether your local 911 emergency response center is equipped to receive GPS location information, contact your local authorities. In general, if your phone has access to signals from more GPS satellites, your location will be determined faster and more accurately than if your phone has access to signals from fewer GPS satellites. Viewing Your Approximate Location If your phone does not have adequate access to GPS satellites signals, the location of the nearest cell tower in contact with your phone is automatically made available to the emergency response center, if the center has the capability to receive such information. See Enhancing GPS Performance on page 96 for information on how to help your phone determine your location. Viewing Your Approximate Location 1 From the main menu, select GPS > Position. 2 Scroll to view the entire screen. This displays the following information about the last time your location was calculated:
The time (as Greenwich Mean Time) and date that the location was last calculated.
The approximate location, expressed as latitude and longitude.
The estimated accuracy of the calculated location. This estimate of accuracy is only a very rough estimate and may vary substantially from the actual accuracy of the approximate location information reported. 95 GPS Enabled
The number of satellites used to calculate the location. In general, more satellites make for better accuracy. To calculate your location again:
Press A under Rfrsh. It may take your phone several minutes to complete the process of determining your location. During this time, a message usually appears on your phones display saying your phone is scanning for satellites. For tips on getting the best location calculation, see Enhancing GPS Performance. The Position screen displays the updated information. To cancel a location calculation before it is completed:
Press A under Cancel to return to the Position screen. -or-
Press e to return to the idle screen. Each time approximate location of your phone is calculated, the latest location information is stored in your phone and remains there even when your phone is powered off. You will see this information the next time you view the Position screen. 96 If you received a phone call or alert while attempting to determine your location, the Position screen will disappear, but your phone will continue attempting to determine its location. If it is successful, the new location information will be displayed the next time you view the Position screen. Enhancing GPS Performance Sometimes the GPS feature of your phone may be unable to complete a location calculation successfully. If this happens when you are making an emergency call, the location of the nearest cell tower in contact with your phone is made available to the appropriate emergency response center if the center has the capability to receive such information. If this happens when you are trying to view your location on the phones display, you will see a message indicating that your phone cannot access satellites. To improve accuracy and increase your chances of a successful calculation, do the following while your phone is determining your approximate location:
Stay in the open. The GPS feature works best where there is nothing between your phone and a large amount of open sky. If possible, go outside, away from tall buildings and foliage. While performance in a building is improved by moving closer to windows, glass with certain sun shielding films may block satellite signals.
Hold your phone to enhance reception. Signals from GPS satellites are transmitted to your GPS antenna, which is inside the back of your phone, opposite the earpiece, above the label with your service providers name on it. Hold your phone away from your body, giving the antenna clear access to satellite signals. Do not cover the antenna area with your fingers or anything else. Enhancing GPS Performance
Stand still. If possible, stand still until your phone is finished determining your location. Moving your phone at a walking pace while your phone is calculating your approximate location may substantially decrease GPS performance. In a car. When using the GPS Enabled feature in a car, position your phone so that the GPS antenna has good access to GPS signals through the cars windows. Typically, the GPS antenna has best access to GPS signals in a car when placed near a window. Note: Although moving your phone at a walking pace decreases GPS performance, moving it at the speed of a moving car does not. GPS antenna area
Stay in network coverage. Depending on who your service provider is, the network will provide your phone with information that helps determine your location more quickly and accurately. 97
GPS Enabled Updating Satellite Almanac Data Another way to keep the GPS feature of your phone working well is to keep your satellite almanac data up to date. The United States government maintains an almanac of data about where GPS satellites are as they orbit the Earth. This information is available to your phone. Keeping your satellite almanac up to date helps your phone determine your location more quickly. The almanac contains information about the location of satellites, their operational status, and other satellite information. Keeping this information updated enhances the performance of your GPS feature. In most cases, your phone will be able to get a fix in strong satellite signal conditions with outdated almanac data, but it may take longer. Note: When you make an emergency call, your phone does not rely upon the almanac to determine your location. If your satellite almanac data is out of date, your phone may prompt you to update it. Follow the instructions that appear on the phones display. You may be asked to go to a web site or call a customer care number. 98 Setting Privacy Options Your phones GPS privacy options control whether software applications may view the location of your phone.You may set your phone to one of these GPS privacy options:
Restricted No software applications may view the location of your phone. However, location information may still be available to the phones owner, fleet manager, or account administrator.
Unrestricted All applications may view the location of your phone, without notifying you.
By Permission When an application attempts to view the location of your phone, you will be prompted to give permission. However, location information may still be available to the phones owner, fleet manager, or account administrator. Note: Privacy options do not apply to the transmission of location information during emergency 911 calls. To set your GPS privacy options:
1 From the main menu, select GPS > Privacy. 2 If your GPS PIN security feature is enabled, enter your GPS PIN. (See Setting the GPS PIN Security Feature for more information.) 3 Scroll to the privacy setting you want. 4 Press A under Select. Setting the GPS PIN Security Feature To prevent your GPS privacy settings from being altered without your knowledge, your GPS privacy option can be protected by a PIN. When you receive your phone, the GPS security feature is turned off, so you do not have to enter a GPS PIN to access your GPS privacy options. If you turn this feature on, you will be required to enter a GPS PIN to access your GPS privacy options. To turn the GPS Enabled security feature on or off:
1 From the main menu, select Settings >
Security > GPS PIN. 2 Scroll to On or Off. 3 Press A under Select. 4 Enter the current GPS PIN. Note: When you receive your phone, your GPS PIN is 0000. 5 Press A under Ok. To change your GPS PIN:
1 From the main menu, select Settings >
Security > Change Password > GPS PIN. Using GPS with Map Software 2 Enter the current GPS PIN. Note: When you receive your phone, your GPS PIN is 0000. 3 Press A under Ok. 4 Enter the new 4- to 8-digit GPS PIN. 5 Press A under Ok. 6 Enter the new 4- to 8-digit GPS PIN to confirm. 7 Press A under Ok. Using GPS with Map Software You can use the GPS feature of your phone to provide approximate location data to a laptop computer or similar device that is running interactive map software such as that made by DeLorme or Microsoft. This way, if your phone has good access to GPS signals, your approximate position on a map can be made available as you travel in a vehicle. To do this, connect your phone to your laptop (or other device) with a data cable and set your phone to transmit data (see Getting Started on page 100). Your phone then provides your approximate location to the device running the map software, which displays your location on a map. Your phone provides an updated location every second and the map software displays your changing location on its map. 99 GPS Enabled See Enhancing GPS Performance on page 96 for more details on obtaining good location information. Note: Because your phone is continuously determining your location, using the GPS feature of your phone with map software uses the phones battery power quickly. Software Compatibility Your phone sends location information to your laptop or other device using the standard National Marine Electronics Association (NMEA) format. Your phone supports output messages in NMEA-0183 format and supports the following NMEA-0183 sentences: GGA, GLL, GSA, GSV, RMC, and VTG. The map software running on your laptop or other device must support NMEA 3.0. Getting Started To connect your phone to your laptop or other device:
1 Open the connector cover. 100 connector cover 2 With the phones display facing up, insert the data cables connector into the accessory connector, until you hear a click. 3 Insert the data plug into the COM port of your laptop or other device. Make sure no other application is using the COM port selected. Make sure the COM port settings of your laptop or other device are set to the following:
Bits per second: 4800
Data bits: 8
Parity: None
Stop bits: 1
Flow control: Hardware To set your phone to send location information to your laptop or other device:
1 From the main menu, select GPS > Interface. 2 With NMEA OUT highlighted, press A under Change. 3 Scroll to On. 4 Press A under Select. Your phone is now sending location data to your laptop or other device. To stop your phone from sending location data to your laptop or other device:
Set NMEA OUT to Off. Each time you power your phone on, NMEA OUT is automatically set to Off. Using GPS with Map Software 101 Voice Records Note: This is an optional feature. Contact your service provider about its availability for purchase. A voice record is a recording you make with your phone and can play back. You can record notes to yourself or phone calls. Your phone can store up to 20 voice records. Creating Voice Records To record a note to yourself:
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecd > [New VoiceRec]. 2 Say the message you want to record into the microphone. Tip: To stop recording before you are finished, press A under Pause. To start recording again, press A under Resume. 3 When you are finished recording, press A. To add to the end of voice record:
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecd. 2 Scroll to the voice record you want to add to. 3 Press m. 4 Scroll to Add To. 102 5 When you are finished recording, press A. To record a phone call:
1 While on an active call, press m. 2 Scroll to Record. 3 When you are finished recording, press A. Note: Recording of phone calls is subject to applicable laws regarding privacy and recording of phone conversations. Playing Voice Records 1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecd. 2 Select the voice record you want to play. 3 To stop the voice record while it is playing, press A. Tip: To fast forward, scroll right. To rewind, scroll left. To pause or resume, press any number key. Labelling Voice Records When you create a voice record, it is labeled with the time and date it was recorded. You can then rename it with a custom label. 1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecd. 2 Scroll to the voice record you want to label. 3 Press m under Label. 4 Enter the label you want to assign. See Entering Text on page 29. 5 Press A. Deleting Voice Records To delete a voice record:
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord. 2 Scroll to the unlocked voice record you want to delete. 3 Press m. 4 Select Delete. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. To delete all voice records:
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord. 2 Scroll to any voice record. 3 Press m. 4 Select Delete All. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. Locking Voice Records When you lock a message, it cannot be deleted until you unlock it. 1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecd. Deleting Voice Records 2 Scroll to the message you want to lock or unlock. 3 Press m. 4 Scroll to Lock to lock the message. -or-
Scroll to Unlock to unlock the message. When a voice record is locked, this icon R appears next to it. Managing Memory To view the amount of memory available for voice records:
1 From the main menu, select VoiceRecord. 2 With [New VoiceRec] highlighted, press A under Memory. -or-
With any voice record highlighted, press m. Select Memory. To free more memory by deleting all unlocked voice records:
1 From the voice records memory screen, press A under Delete. 2 Press A under Yes to confirm. 103 Voice Records Note: Voice records are stored in your phone using the same memory space used to store messages, Java application data, and ring tones. Deleting some of these other items frees memory space for voice records. 104 Customizing Your Phone Setting the Volume To set the volume of the sound coming from the phones earpiece or speaker:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Volume. 2 Scroll to Earpiece to set the earpiece volume.
-or-
Scroll to Speaker to set the speaker volume. 3 Press A under Change. 4 To select the volume:
Scroll left or right. -or-
Press the volume controls. 5 Press A under Ok. To set the volume of the phones ring:
Press the volume controls. For another way to set the volume of the phones ring, or the volume of many other sounds your phone makes:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > Volume. 2 Scroll to the option you want and make the change. Choose Line 1 or Line 2 to set the volume of the phones ring when you get a call on that line. See Volume Features on page 107. Setting Your Phone to Not Ring To set your phone to make no sound when you receive phone calls, Private calls, group calls, message notifications, and call alerts, see Turning Ring Tones Off on page 44. To set your phone to vibrate instead of making a sound when you receive Private calls and group calls, even if you want your phone to ring for other features:
1 From the main menu, select Settings > 2-Way Radio > Alert Type. Tip: If Alert Type does not appear: From the main menu, select Ring Tones. Make sure VibeAll or SilentAll is set to Off. Repeat step 1. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Scroll to Vibrate. 4 Press A under Select. Note: This is an optional feature. Contact your service provider about its availability for purchase. 105 Customizing Your Phone If your phone does not include a vibrate feature, you can still set your phone to make no sound. Scroll to Silent in step 3. Seeing the Display Better To set the contrast of the display:
1 From the main menu, select Settings >
Display/Info > Contrast. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Scroll left or right to set the contrast. 4 Press A under Ok. Using Settings Settings contains many submenus that let you customize your phone. Display/Info Features The Display/Info menu controls how the keypad and display appear:
Backlight controls how long the backlight stays on after you make or receive a call.
Contrast sets the contrast on the display. See Seeing the Display Better on page 106.
Language sets the language that your phone displays. Phone Calls Features The Phone Calls menu controls how your phone handles phone calls:
Set Line sets phone line 1 or phone line 2 as the active line for outgoing calls.
Any Key Ans If this feature is on, you can answer calls by pressing any key number on the keypad.
Auto Redial sets your phone to automatically redial calls you make when the system is busy.
Call Waiting See Call Waiting on page 35.
Auto Ans sets your phone to automatically answer an incoming call after a specified number of rings. When this feature is on, the phone answers by connecting you to the caller;
it does not send the call to voice mail, unless you are out of coverage or on the line.
Clock controls whether the time and date appears on the idle screen, sets the format of the time and date, and sets the year.
Minute Beep causes a beep to sound every minute of an active call.
Call Duration causes the duration of a call to appear on the phones display when the call ends. 106
TTY lets you use your phone with a TTY device. See Making TTY Calls on page 41.
Notifications See Setting Notification Options on page 59. 2-Way Radio Features The 2-Way Radio menu controls how your phone handles Private calls and group calls:
Tkgrp Silent controls whether you hear group calls to your Talkgroup. See Receiving Group Calls on page 39.
Tkgrp Area lets you define your Talkgroup area.
One Touch PTT See Setting One Touch PTT on page 37.
Alert Type controls how your phone notifies you when you receive Private calls and group calls. See page 105. Volume Features The Volume menu sets the volume of sounds your phone makes:
Line 1 sets ring volume for phone line 1.
Line 2 sets ring volume for phone line 2.
Messages sets the volume of message notifications. Using Settings
Earpiece sets the volume of sound coming out of the earpiece.
Speaker sets the volume of sound coming out of the speaker.
Keypad sets the volume of sound associated with pressing keys and buttons.
Data sets the volume of sounds that notify you that you are receiving a circuit data call. Security Features The Security menu lets you turn security features on and off and change passwords:
Phone Lock turns on a feature that locks your phone, either immediately or automatically after a set period of inactivity. An unlock code is required to enable this feature, to unlock the phone, and to set a new unlock code. Contact your service provider for your default unlock code.
Keypad Lock locks the phones keypad, either immediately or automatically after a set period of inactivity. See Locking the Keypad on page 14 for more information on locking and unlocking the keypad.
SIM PIN enables and disables your phones SIM PIN security feature. See Turning the PIN Requirement On and Off on page 12. 107
Baud Rate sets the baud rate at which your phone communicates with a laptop computer, PC, or similar device. Customizing Your Phone
GPS PIN enables and disables your phones GPS PIN security feature. See Setting the GPS PIN Security Feature on page 99.
Change Passwords changes your phone unlock code, security code, SIM PIN, and GPS PIN. Advanced Features The Advanced menu contains advanced and rarely used Settings features.
Alert Timeout controls the amount of time a tone continues to sound when you receive a message notification or call alert.
Headset/Spker sets headset option. See Using a Headset on page 116.
Connectivity Network ID sets the phones network IDs and their roaming options under the direction of your service provider; Master Reset lets your service provider reset your service in the event of a security or provisioning problem.
Reset Defaults Reset Settings returns all settings to their original defaults; Reset All returns all settings to their original defaults and erases all stored lists. Use only under the direction of your service provider.
Return to Home controls how long the recent calls list displays after calls. 108 Profiles A profile is a group of settings saved together so that you can apply them to your phone easily. A profile contains these settings:
Ring Tones sets all options described in Ring Tones on page 44, except assigning ring tones to Contacts.
Display/Info sets Color Palette, Text Size, and Backlight options. See Display/Info Features on page 106.
Phone Calls sets Set Line and Auto Ans options. See Phone Calls Features on page 106.
Volume sets all options described in Volume Features on page 107.
Call Filter controls which calls, call alerts, and message notifications your phone responds to. See Setting Call Filtering on page 112.
Advanced sets headset option. See Using a Headset on page 116. Your phone arrives with pre-set profiles. You can also create your own profiles. Viewing Profiles To view the profiles stored in your phone:
1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Select the profile you want to view. Tip: The profile that is currently in effect on your phone has a checkmark next to it. 3 Press A under View. 4 Scroll to view values of settings. Switching Profiles To apply a profile to your phone:
1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Scroll to the profile you want to apply. 3 Press A under OK. The profile you selected is now in effect. Surveillance Profile Setting your phone to the Surveillance profile will set your phone to never turn on its backlight or transmit sound. This setting is designed for public safety use with an earbud or headset only. Your phone will vibrate for all incoming calls. 109 Profiles Note: Earbuds and headsets are sold separately. To order accessories, log on to our Web site at www.motorola.com/store/iden or contact your Motorola Authorized Retailer. How Changing Settings Affects Profiles Many of the settings contained in profiles can be set without switching or editing profiles for example, by selecting Settings or Ring Tones to set options, or by setting the volume of the phones ring using the volume controls. When you do this, your phone either:
Updates the profile in effect to reflect these changes, without notifying you -or-
Creates a temporary profile that contains these changes Note: This feature may not be offered by your service provider. To set your phone to create a temporary profile that contains changes you make to settings:
1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Press m. 3 Select Setup > Temp Profile. 110 4 Set this option to On. To set your phone to update the profile in effect to reflect any changes you make to settings:
Set Temp Profile to Off in step 4. If your service provider does not offer the Temp Profile option, your phone always updates the profile in effect to reflect the changes you make to settings. Note: You cannot change any of the settings in the Surveillance profile. Temporary Profiles If your phone is set to create temporary profiles, a temporary profile is created when you make changes to settings without switching or editing profiles. A temporary profile is based on the profile in effect when you made the changes, but reflects the changed settings. Making more changes further updates the temporary profile, for as long as it is in effect. A temporary profile stays in effect until you switch profiles, power off your phone, or delete it (or the profile it is based on) from the list of profiles. If you do not store a temporary profile, it is deleted when you switch profiles or power off your phone. A temporary profile is automatically given the same name as the profile it is based on, but with an asterisk (*) in front of it. When you view a temporary profiles settings, the options that differ from the profile it is based on have an asterisk in front of them. Storing a Temporary Profile To store a temporary profile as a new profile:
1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Scroll to the temporary profile. 3 Press m. 4 Select Store As New. 5 Enter the name you want to give the profile. See Entering Text on page 48. When you are finished, press A under OK. To overwrite the profile that temporary profile is based on:
1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Scroll to the temporary profile. 3 Press m. 4 Select Store Changes. Creating Profiles The temporary profile is stored with the name of the profile it is based on. The profile it is based on, as it existed before you made changes to settings, is gone. Creating Profiles 1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Select [New Profile]. -or-
Scroll to any profile. Press m. Select New. 3 Enter the name you want to give the profile. See Entering Text on page 48. When you are finished, press A under OK. 4 If you want to base this profile on an existing profile: Select Copy From. Select the profile you want to base this profile on. If you do not choose a profile to copy from, the new profile is based on a default profile. 5 Press A under Create. 6 Scroll through the list of options and set their values. 7 Press A under Done. Editing Profiles 1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Scroll to the profile you want to edit. 111 Profiles 3 Press m. 4 Select Edit. 5 Follow the applicable instructions in Creating Profiles to edit the various fields. Note: You cannot edit the Surveillance profile. Deleting Profiles To delete a profile:
1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Select the profile you want to delete. Note: A temporary profile is automatically deleted when the profile it is based on is deleted. 3 Press m. 4 Select Delete. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. To delete all profiles:
1 From the main menu, select Profiles. 2 Press m. 3 Select Delete All. 4 Press A under Yes to confirm. 112 Setting Call Filtering The call filtering setting in each profile lets you control which calls, call alerts, and message notifications your phone notifies you of, and which it ignores. To set call filtering:
1 While setting options for a profile, select Call Filter. 2 To set filtering options for phone calls, select Phone.
Off sets your phone to notify you of all phone calls.
All sets your phone to ignore all phone calls.
All Contacts sets your phone to notify you only of phone calls from numbers stored in Contacts.
Some Cntcs sets your phone to notify you only of phone calls from numbers you select from Contacts. 3 If you set the Phone option to Some Cntcs, select up to 5 Contacts entries that contain phone numbers you want to be notified of calls from. When you are finished, press A under Done. 4 To set filtering options for Private calls and group calls, select Prvt/Grp.
Off sets your phone to notify you of all Private calls and group calls.
On sets your phone to ignore all Private calls and group calls. Setting Call Filtering 5 To set filtering options for call alerts, select Alerts.
Off sets your phone to notify you of all call alerts.
On sets your phone to ignore all call alerts. 6 To set filtering options for message notifications, select Notifications.
Off sets your phone to notify you of all messages.
Voice Messages sets your phone not to sound a tone or vibrate when you receive voice messages.
Text Messages sets your phone not to sound a tone or vibrate when you receive text messages.
All sets your phone not to sound a tone or vibrate when you receive any message. Note: When you receive a type of message you have set not to sound a tone or vibrate, the messages notification screen appears as usual. 7 Press A under Done. 113 Shortcuts Shortcuts lets you access most menu options by pressing a number on your keypad or saying the voice name of the shortcut. You create the shortcut and then use it to take you to that screen any time. Creating a Shortcut 1 Go to the menu item you want to create a shortcut for. For example, if you want to create a shortcut to the screen for creating a new Contacts entry:
From the main menu, select Contacts, then highlight [New Contact]. 2 Press and hold m until a confirmation screen appears. 3 Press A under Yes. 4 Select Key. 5 Press the number key you want to assign to the shortcut. 6 Press A under OK. 7 If you want to record a voice name for the shortcut: Select Voice. As directed by the screen prompts, say and repeat the name you want to assign to the number. Speak clearly into the microphone. 114 8 Press A under Done. Using a Shortcut If you know the shortcut number:
1 From the idle screen, press m. 2 On your keypad, press the number assigned to the shortcut. If you do not know the shortcut number:
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts. 2 Scroll to the shortcut you want to use. -or-
If you assigned a voice name to the shortcut:
Press and hold t. Say the voice name into your phone. The shortcut with that voice name is then highlighted. 3 Press A under OK. Editing a Shortcut To change the number assigned to a shortcut:
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts. 2 With any shortcut highlighted, press m. 3 Select Reorder. 4 Scroll to the shortcut you want to move. 5 Press A under Grab. 6 Scroll to the place where you want the shortcut to appear. 7 Press A under Insert. 8 Repeat step 4 through step 7 for all the items you want to move. 9 Press A under Done. To change the number or voice name assigned to a shortcut:
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts. 2 Highlight any shortcut. 3 Press A under Edit. Deleting Shortcuts To delete a shortcut:
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts. 2 Scroll to the shortcut you want to delete. 3 Press m. 4 Select Delete. 5 Press A under Yes to confirm. To delete all shortcuts:
1 From the main menu, select Shortcuts. 2 With any shortcut highlighted, press m. 3 Select Delete All. 4 Press A under Yes to confirm. Deleting Shortcuts 115 For phone calls, use the remote PTT button to answer calls, switch between calls, and end calls. Hold the remote PTT button for less than 2 seconds to answer calls and switch between calls. Hold the remote PTT button for more than 2 seconds to end calls. For Private calls, use the remote PTT button as you would the PTT button on your phone. Using a Headset If you use a headset or similar device with your phone, you can set your phone to send incoming sound to the headset only, or to the headset and the speaker at the same time:
1 From the main menu, select Settings >
Advanced > Headset/Spkr. 2 Press A under Change. 3 Scroll to HdsetOnly to send incoming sound to the headset only. -or-
Scroll to Hdset&Spkr to send incoming sound to the headset and the speaker at the same time. 4 Press A under Select. Attaching a Headset 1 Lift the audio jack cover. 2 Insert the headset connector firmly into the audio jack. You may have to rotate the headset jack until it fits securely into the audio jack. Using a Remote PTT Button If you are using a headset or other accessory with a remote PTT button, you can use the remote PTT button for phone calls and Private calls. 116 Status Messages Message Description Understanding Status Messages You may receive status messages under certain conditions. Before contacting Customer Care, note the message, numeric code, and the conditions under which it appeared. The following table lists and describes the status messages. Status Messages Message Description The number that you entered is not valid. Number Not in Service User Not Available The phone that you called is either busy, out of coverage, or turned off. Please try again later. The person that you called has not purchased this service. User Not Authorized System Busy Please Try Again Self Check Error +
Number Code Self Check Fail +
Number Code PIN Blocked Call Your Provider Please Try Later This service is temporarily not available. Please try again later. Service Restricted This service was restricted by your service provider, or this service was not purchased. You are either out of coverage or having problems with provisioning. Service Not Available Insert SIM Check SIM Card Wrong PIN The system is experiencing heavy traffic. Please try again later. An error occurred. Please try again. A fault was detected with your phone. If this error recurs, note the error code and contact Customer Care. An operational fault was detected with your phone. Note the numeric code, turn your phone off, and contact Customer Care. The incorrect PIN was entered 3 consecutive times. You will be unable to place or receive calls on your phone. Contact Customer Care to have them obtain the PIN Unblocking Key (PUK) code. Your SIM card is not being detected. Please check to ensure that you have inserted the SIM card correctly into your phone. Please check your SIM card to make sure it has been inserted properly. You have entered an incorrect PIN number. 117 Understanding Status Messages Status Messages Message Description Enter SIM PIN Please enter your 4- to 8- digit SIM PIN code. Enter Unlock Code Auto Phone Lock is activated. Enter you unlock code. Warns of low memory for Net Alerts. Searching for GPS satellites. Could not find GPS satellites. A problem occurred in your phones GPS circuitry. If this error occurs, contact Customer Care New Browser Message Memory Full!
Scanning for Satellites Unable to Locate Sats Technical Error 118 Safety and General Information IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON SAFE AND EFFICIENT OPERATION. READ THIS INFORMATION BEFORE USING YOUR INTEGRATED MULTI-SERVICE PORTABLE RADIO. RF Operational Characteristics Your radio product contains a radio frequency transmitter to convey the information you wish to send as well as occasional automatic signals used to sustain connection to the wireless network, and a receiver which enables you to receive communication and connection information from the network. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Portable Radio Product Operation and EME Exposure Your Motorola radio product is designed to comply with the following national and international standards and guidelines regarding exposure of human beings to radio frequency electromagnetic energy (EME):
United States Federal Communications Commission, Code of Federal Regulations; 47 CFR part 2 sub-part J.
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) /
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE). C95. 1-1992. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
(IEEE). C95. 1-1999 Edition. International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP) 1998.
Ministry of Health (Canada). Safety Code 6. Limits of Human Exposure to Radiofrequency Electromagnetic Fields in the Frequency Range from 3 kHz to 300 GHz, 1999.
Australian Communications Authority Radiocommunications (Electromagnetic Radiation - Human Exposure) Standard 2003. 119
Safety and General Information
ANATEL, Brasil Regulatory Authority, Resolution 256 (April 11, 2001) additional requirements for SMR, cellular and PCS product certification. To assure optimal radio product performance and make sure human exposure to radio frequency electromagnetic energy is within the guidelines set forth in the above standards, always adhere to the following procedures:
Phone Operation When placing or receiving a phone call, hold your radio product as you would a wireline telephone. Speak directly into the microphone. Two-way radio operation When using your radio product as a traditional two-way radio, hold the radio product in a vertical position with the microphone one to two inches (2.5 to 5 cm) away from the lips. Body-worn operation To maintain compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines, if you wear a radio product on your body when transmitting, always place the radio product in a Motorola approved clip, holder, holster, case or body harness for this product. Use of non-Motorola-approved accessories may 120 exceed FCC RF exposure guidelines. If you do not use a Motorola approved body-worn accessory and are not using the radio product in the intended use positions along side the head in the phone mode or in front of the face in the two-way radio mode, then ensure the antenna and the radio product are kept the following minimum distances from the body when transmitting
Phone or Two-way radio mode: one inch (2.5 cm)
Data operation using any data feature with or without an accessory cable: one inch (2.5 cm) Antenna Care Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized antennas, modifications, or attachments could damage the radio product and may violate FCC regulations. DO NOT hold the antenna when the radio product is IN USE. Holding the antenna affects call quality and may cause the radio product to operate at a higher power level than needed. Portable Radio Product Operation and EME Exposure Approved Accessories For a list of approved Motorola accessories call 1-800-453-0920, or visit our website at www.motorola.com/iden. ALL MODELS WITH FCC ID AZ489FT5830 MEET THE GOVERNMENTS REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the emission limits for exposure to radiofrequency (RF) energy set by the Federal Communications Commission of the U.S. Government. These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are based on standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for wireless mobile phones employs a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit set by the FCC is 1.6W/kg.1 Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions reviewed by the FCC with the phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR level of the phone while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the phone is designed to operate at multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output. Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that is does not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (e.g., at the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The highest SAR value for this model phone when tested for use at the ear is 1.05 W/kg and when tested on the body, as described in this user guide, is 1.09 W/kg during packet data transmission. (Body-worn measurements differ among phone models, depending upon available accessories and FCC requirements.)2 While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and at various positions, they all meet the government requirement for safe exposure. The FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this model phone with all reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. SAR information on this model phone is on file with the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://www.fcc.gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID AZ489FT5830. Additional information on Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) can be found on the Cellular Telecommunications Industry Association (CTIA) web-site at http://www.wow-com.com. 1 In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6 watts/kg (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. 121 Safety and General Information 2 The SAR information reported to the FCC includes the FCC-accepted Motorola testing protocol, assessment procedure, and measurement uncertainty range for this product. Electro Magnetic Interference/Compatibility Note: Nearly every electronic device is susceptible to electromagnetic interference (EMI) if inadequately shielded, designed or otherwise configured for electromagnetic compatibility. Facilities To avoid electromagnetic interference and/or compatibility conflicts, turn off your radio product in any facility where posted notices instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment that is sensitive to external RF energy. Aircraft When instructed to do so, turn off your radio product when on board an aircraft. Any use of a radio product must be in accordance with applicable regulations per airline crew instructions. 122 Medical Devices Pacemakers The Advanced Medical Technology Association
(AdvaMed) recommends that a minimum separation of 6 inches (15 cm) be maintained between a handheld wireless radio product and a pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with those of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration. Persons with pacemakers should:
ALWAYS keep the radio product more than 6 inches (15 cm) from their pacemaker when the radio product is turned ON.
Not carry the radio product in a breast pocket.
Use the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference.
Turn the radio product OFF immediately if you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place. Hearing Aids Some digital wireless radio products may interfere with some hearing aids. In the event of such interference, you may want to consult your hearing aid manufacturer to discuss alternatives. Other Medical Devices If you use any other personal medical device, consult the manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately shielded from RF energy. Your physician may be able to assist you in obtaining this information. Use While Driving Check the laws and regulations on the use of radio products in the area where you drive. Always obey them. When using the radio product while driving, please:
Give full attention to driving and to the road.
Use hands-free operation, if available.
Pull off the road and park before making or answering a call if driving conditions so require. Operational Warnings
!!
Operational Warnings For Vehicles with an Air Bag Do not place a portable radio product in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployment area. Air bags inflate with great force. If a portable radio is placed in the air bag deployment area and the air bag inflates, the radio product may be propelled with great force and cause serious injury to occupants of the vehicle. Potentially Explosive Atmospheres Turn off your radio product prior to entering any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere, unless it is a radio product type especially qualified for use in such areas as Intrinsically Safe (for example, Factory Mutual, CSA, or UL approved). Do not remove, install, or charge batteries in such areas. Sparks in a potentially explosive atmosphere can cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Note: The areas with potentially explosive atmospheres referred to above include fueling areas such as below decks on boats, fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities, areas where the air contains chemicals or particles, such 123 Safety and General Information as grain, dust or metal powders, and any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Areas with potentially explosive atmospheres are often but not always posted. Blasting Caps and Areas To avoid possible interference with blasting operations, turn off your radio product when you are near electrical blasting caps, in a blasting area, or in areas posted: Turn off two-way radio. Obey all signs and instructions. Operational Cautions Batteries All batteries can cause property damage and/or bodily injury, such as burns if a conductive material such as jewelry, keys, or beaded chains touches exposed terminals. The conductive material may complete an electrical circuit (short circuit) and become quite hot. Exercise care in handling any charged battery, particularly when placing it inside a pocket, purse, or other container with metal objects. To reduce the risk of injury, batteries should not be exposed to fire, disassembled, or crushed.
!
124 Cleaning and Drying Considerations Using a leather carry case may help protect the surfaces and help prevent liquids (e.g., rain) from entering into the interior of the radio product. This product is not water proof, and exposing the unit to liquids may result in permanent damage to the unit. If your radio product interior gets wet, then do not try to accelerate drying with the use of an oven or a dryer as this will damage the radio product and void the warranty. Instead, do the following:
1 Immediately power off the radio product. 2 Remove Battery and SIM card (if so equipped) from radio product. 3 Shake excess liquid from radio product. 4 Place the radio product and battery in an area that is at room temperature and has good air flow. 5 Let the radio product, battery, and SIM card dry for 72 hours before reconnecting the battery and/or powering on the radio product. If the radio product does not work after following the steps listed above, contact your dealer for servicing information. Clean the external surfaces of the radio product with a damp cloth, using a mild solution of dishwashing detergent and water. Some household cleaners may contain chemicals that could seriously damage the radio product. Avoid the use of any petroleum-based solvent cleaners. Also, avoid applying liquids directly on the radio product. Accessory Safety Information Important: Save these accessory safety instructions.
Before using any battery or battery charger, read all the instructions for and cautionary markings on (1) the battery, (2) the battery charger, which may include a separate wall-mounted power supply or transformer, and (3) the radio product using the battery.
Do not expose any battery charger to water, rain, or snow as they are designed for indoor or in-vehicle use only.
!!
Warning: To reduce the risk of injury, charge only the rechargeable batteries described in Battery on page 3. Other types of batteries may burst, causing personal injury and damage. Accessory Safety Information
To reduce the risk of damage to the cord or plug, pull by the plug rather than the cord when you disconnect the battery charger from the power source outlet.
Do not operate any battery charger with a damaged cord or plug replace them immediately.
Battery chargers may become warm during operation, but not hot. If it becomes hot to the touch, unplug it from the power outlet immediately and discontinue its use.
Use of a non-recommended attachment to a battery charger may result in a risk of fire, electric shock, or injury to persons.
Make sure the battery charger power cord is located so that it will not be stepped on, tripped over, or subjected to damage or stress.
An extension cord should not be used with any battery charger unless absolutely necessary. Use of an improper extension cord could result in a risk of fire and electric shock. If an extension cord must be used, make sure that:
The pins on the plug of the extension cord are the same number, size, and shape as those on the plug of the charger.
The extension cord is properly wired and in good electrical condition. 125 Safety and General Information
The cord size is 18AWG for lengths up to 100 feet and 16AWG for lengths up to 150 feet.
Do not operate any battery charger if it has received a sharp blow, has been dropped, or has been damaged in any way; take it to a qualified service technician.
Do not disassemble a battery charger; take it to a qualified service technician when service or repair is required. Incorrect reassembly may result in a risk of electric shock or fire.
Maximum ambient temperature around the power supply or transformer of any battery charger should not exceed 40C (104F).
The output power from the power supply or transformer must not exceed the rating given on the Desktop Dual-Pocket Charger.
The disconnection from the line voltage is made by unplugging the power supply from the AC receptacle.
To reduce risk of electric shock, unplug any battery charger from the outlet before attempting any maintenance or cleaning. For optimum charging performance, turn off the radio product while charging it in any battery charger. 126 MOTOROLA LIMITED WARRANTY Note: FOR IDEN SUBSCRIBER PRODUCTS, ACCESSORIES AND SOFTWARE PURCHASED IN THE UNITED STATES OR CANADA What Does this Warranty Cover?
Subject to the exclusions contained below, Motorola, Inc. warrants its Motorola iDEN Digital Mobile and Portable Handsets ("Products"), Motorola-branded or certified accessories sold for use with these Products ("Accessories") and Motorola software contained on CD-Roms or other tangible media and sold for use with these Products ("Software") to be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal consumer usage for the period(s) outlined below. This limited warranty is a consumer's exclusive remedy, and applies as follows to new Products, Accessories and Software purchased by consumers in the United States or Canada, which are accompanied by this written warranty:
LENGTH OF COVERAGE One (1) year from the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser of the product. One (1) year from the date of purchase by the first consumer purchaser of the product. The balance of the original warranty or for ninety (90) days from the date returned to the consumer, whichever is longer. Ninety (90) days from the date of purchase. PRODUCTS COVERED Products as defined above. Accessories as defined above. Products or Accessories that are Repaired or Replaced. Software as defined above. Applies only to physical defects in the media that embodies the copy of the software
(e.g. CD-ROM, or floppy disk). 127 MOTOROLA LIMITED WARRANTY What is not covered? (Exclusions) Normal Wear and Tear. Periodic maintenance, repair and replacement of parts due to normal wear and tear are excluded from coverage. Batteries. Only batteries whose fully charged capacity falls below 80% of their rated capacity and batteries that leak are covered by this limited warranty. Abuse & Misuse. Defects or damage that result from: (a) improper operation, storage, misuse or abuse, accident or neglect, such as physical damage (cracks, scratches, etc.) to the surface of the product resulting from misuse; (b) contact with liquid, water, rain, extreme humidity or heavy perspiration, sand, dirt or the like, extreme heat, or food; (c) use of the Products or Accessories for commercial purposes or subjecting the Product or Accessory to abnormal usage or conditions; or (d) other acts which are not the fault of Motorola, are excluded from coverage. Use of Non-Motorola Products and Accessories. Defects or damage that result from the use of Non-Motorola branded or certified Products, Accessories, Software or other peripheral equipment are excluded from coverage. 128 Unauthorized Service or Modification. Defects or damages resulting from service, testing, adjustment, installation, maintenance, alteration, including without limitation, software changes, or modification in any way by someone other than Motorola, or its authorized service centers, are excluded from coverage. Altered Products. Products or Accessories with
(a) serial numbers or date tags that have been removed, altered or obliterated; (b) broken seals or that show evidence of tampering; (c) mismatched board serial numbers; or (d) nonconforming or non-Motorola housings, antennas, or parts, are excluded from coverage. Communication Services. Defects, damages, or the failure of Products, Accessories or Software due to any communication service or signal you may subscribe to or use with the Products, Accessories or Software is excluded from coverage. Software Embodied in Physical Media. No warranty is made that the software will meet your requirements or will work in combination with any hardware or software applications provided by third parties, that the operation of the software products will be uninterrupted or error free, or that all defects in the software products will be corrected. Software NOT Embodied in Physical Media. Software that is not embodied in physical media
(e.g. software that is downloaded from the internet), is provided "as is" and without warranty. Who is covered? This warranty extends only to the first consumer purchaser, and is not transferable. What will Motorola Do? Motorola, at its option, will at no charge repair, replace or refund the purchase price of any Products, Accessories or Software that does not conform to this warranty. We may use functionally equivalent reconditioned/refurbished/pre-owned or new Products, Accessories or parts. No data, software or applications added to your Product, Accessory or Software, including but not limited to personal contacts, games and ringer tones, will be reinstalled. To avoid losing such data, software and applications please create a back up prior to requesting service. How to Obtain Warranty Service or Other Information? To obtain service or information, please call:
Motorola iDEN Customer Services 1-800-453-0920 or 954-723-4910 TTY-877-483-2840 Or visit us online at http://www.motorola.com/iden/support You will receive instructions on how to ship the Products, Accessories or Software, at your expense, to a Motorola Authorized Repair Center. To obtain service, you must include: (a) a copy of your receipt, bill of sale or other comparable proof of purchase; (b) a written description of the problem; (c) the name of your service provider, if applicable; (d) the name and location of the installation facility (if applicable) and, most importantly; (e) your address and telephone number. What Other Limitations Are There? ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY, OTHERWISE THE REPAIR, REPLACEMENT, OR REFUND AS PROVIDED UNDER THIS EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY IS THE EXCLUSIVE REMEDY OF THE CONSUMER, AND IS PROVIDED IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OF IMPLIED. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE 129 software. No other use, including without limitation disassembly of such Motorola software or exercise of the exclusive rights reserved for Motorola, is permitted. MOTOROLA LIMITED WARRANTY PRODUCT, ACCESSORY OR SOFTWARE, OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR LOSS OF REVENUE OR PROFITS, LOSS OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF INFORMATION OR DATA, SOFTWARE OR APPLICATIONS OR OTHER FINANCIAL LOSS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE ABILITY OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCTS, ACCESSORIES OR SOFTWARE TO THE FULL EXTENT THESE DAMAGES MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. Some states and jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, or limitation on the length of an implied warranty, so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you. This warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you may also have other rights that vary from state to state or from one jurisdiction to another. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyrighted Motorola software such as the exclusive rights to reproduce and distribute copies of the Motorola software. Motorola software may only be copied into, used in, and redistributed with, the Products associated with such Motorola 130 Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International) Note: This Warranty applies in Singapore and the Philippines. I. What This Warranty Covers and For How Long:
MOTOROLA warrants the MOTOROLA manufactured iDEN Communication Products listed below (Product) against defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of time from the date of purchase as scheduled below:
iDEN Subscriber Digital Mobile and Portable Units Product Accessories
(manufactured by or under license from MOTOROLA) Batteries One (1) Year One (1) Year One (1) Year Rechargeable Batteries will be replaced during the applicable warranty period if:
a. the battery capacity falls below 80% of rated capacity, or b. the battery develops leakage. MOTOROLA, at its option, will at no charge either repair the Product (with new or reconditioned parts), replace it (with a new or reconditioned Product), or refund the purchase price of the Product during the warranty period provided it is returned in accordance with the terms of this warranty. Replaced parts or boards are warranted for the balance of the original applicable warranty period. All replaced parts of Product shall become the property of MOTOROLA. This express limited warranty is extended by MOTOROLA to the original end user purchaser only and is not assignable or transferable to any other party. This is the complete warranty for the Product manufactured by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA assumes no obligations or liability for additions or modifications to this warranty unless made in writing and signed by an officer of MOTOROLA. Unless made in a separate agreement between MOTOROLA and the original end user purchaser, MOTOROLA does not warrant the installation, maintenance or service of the Product. 131 Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International) MOTOROLA cannot be responsible in any way for any ancillary equipment not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or used in connection with the Product, or for operation of the Product with any ancillary equipment, and all such equipment if expressly excluded from this warranty. Because each system which may use the Product is unique, MOTOROLA disclaims liability for range, coverage, or operation of the system as a whole, or any portion of the system not produced by MOTOROLA, under this warranty. II. General Provisions:
This warranty sets forth the full extent of MOTOROLAS responsibilities regarding the Product, Repair, replacement or refund of the purchase price, at MOTOROLAS options, is the exclusive remedy. THIS WARRANTY IS GIVEN IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER EXPRESS WARRANTIES. IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INLCUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. IN NO EVENT SHALL MOTOROLA BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT, FOR ANY LOSS OF USE, LOSS OF 132 TIME, INCONVENIENCE, COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOST PROFITS OR SAVINGS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE SUCH PRODUCT, TO THE FULL EXTENT SUCH MAY BE DISCLAIMED BY LAW. III. How to Get Warranty Service:
You must provide proof of purchase (bearing the date of purchase and Product item serial number) in order to receive warranty service and, also, deliver or send the Product item, transportation and insurance prepaid, to an authorized warranty service location. Warranty service will be provided by MOTOROLA through one of its authorized warranty service locations. If you first contact the company which sold you the Product (e.g., dealer or communication service provider), it can facilitate your obtaining warranty service. IV. What This Warranty Does Not Cover:
a. Defects or damage resulting from use of the Product in other than its normal and customary manner. b. Defects or damage from misuse, accident, water, or neglect. c. Defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, alteration, modification, or adjustment. d. Breakage or damage to antennas unless caused directly by defects in material workmanship. e. A Product subjected to unauthorized Product modifications, disassemblies or repairs
(including, without limitation, the audition to the Product of non-MOTOROLA supplied equipment). f. Product which has had the serial number removed or made illegible. g. Rechargeable batteries if:
1.Any of the seals on the battery enclosure of cells are broken or show evidence of tampering. 2.The damage or defect is caused by charging or using the battery in equipment or service other than the Product for which it is specified. h. Freight costs to the repair depot. i. A Product which, due to illegal or unauthorized alteration of the software/firmware in the Product, does not function in accordance with MOTOROLAS published specifications or the local type acceptance labeling in effect for the Product at the time the Product was initially distributed from MOTOROLA. j. Scratches or other cosmetic damage to Product surfaces that does not effect the operation of the Product. k. Normal and customary wear and tear. l. Exclusion for defects or damage arising from use of the products in connection with non-MOTOROLA equipment. VI. Patent and Software Provisions:
MOTOROLA will defend, at its own expense, any suit brought against the end user purchaser to the extent that it is based on a claim that the Product or parts infringe a patent, and Motorola will pay those costs and damages finally awarded against the end user purchaser in any such suit which are attributable to any such claim, but such defense and payments are conditioned on the following:
a. That MOTOROLA will be notified promptly in writing by such purchaser of any notice of such claim;
b. That MOTOROLA will have sole control of the defense of such suit and all negotiations for its 133 Limited Warranty Motorola Communication Products (International) Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for MOTOROLA certain exclusive rights for copyrighted MOTOROLA software, such as the exclusive rights to reproduce in copies and distribute copies of such MOTOROLA software. MOTOROLA software may be used in only the Product in which the software was originally embodied and such software in such Product may not be replaced, copied, distributed, modified in any way, or used to produce any derivative thereof. No other use including, without limitation, alteration, modification, reproduction, distribution, or reverse engineering of such MOTOROLA software or exercise or rights in such MOTOROLA software is permitted. No license is granted by implication, estoppel or otherwise under MOTOROLA patent rights or copyrights. settlement or compromise; and c. Should the Product or parts become, or in MOTOROLAS opinion be likely to become, the subject of a claim of infringement of a patent, that such purchaser will permit MOTOROLA, at its option and expense, either to procure for such purchaser the right to continue using the Product or parts or to replace or modify the same so that it becomes non-infringing or to grant such purchaser a credit for the Product or parts as depreciated and accept its return. The depreciation will be an equal amount per year over the lifetime of the Product or parts as established by MOTOROLA. MOTOROLA will have no liability with respect to any claim of patent infringement which is based upon the combination of the Product or parts furnished hereunder with software, apparatus or devices not furnished by MOTOROLA, nor will MOTOROLA have any liability for the use of ancillary equipment or software not furnished by MOTOROLA which is attached to or sued in connection with the Product or any parts thereof. In no event shall MOTOROLA be liable for any incidental, special or consequential damages arising from any claim of patent infringement or alleged infringement. 134 Patent and Trademark Information MOTOROLA, the Stylized M Logo and all other trademarks indicated as such herein are trademarks of Motorola, Inc. Reg. U.S. Pat. &
Tm. Off. 2004 Motorola, Inc. All rights reserved. Microsoft and Microsoft Internet Explorer are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. T9 is a trademark owned by Tegic Communications. T9 Text Input Patent and Trademark Information This product is covered by U.S. Pat. 5,818,437, U.S. Pat. 5,953,541, U.S. Pat. 6,011,554 and other patents pending. All other product names or services mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective trademark owners. Software Copyright Notice The Motorola products described in this manual may include copyrighted Motorola and third party software stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola and third party software providers certain exclusive rights for copyrighted software, such as the exclusive rights to distribute or reproduce the copyrighted software. Accordingly, any copyrighted software contained in the Motorola products may not be modified, reverse-engineered, distributed, or reproduced in any manner to the extent allowed by law. Furthermore, the purchase of the Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel, or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents, or patent applications of Motorola or any third party software provider, except for the normal, non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. 135 Index Numerics 2-way radio 107 see also Private calls, group calls, and call alerts 3-way calling 36 A Accessories 15 safety 125 Alpha mode 48 B Backlight 106 Battery 2 care 5 charging 3, 4 door 2 inserting 3 safety 124 Baud rate 108 C Call alerts 21 deleting 22 136 queue 21 receiving 21 responding 21, 22 sending 21 sorting 22 viewing 21 Call forwarding all calls 32 missed calls 33 off 33 Call Hold 36 Call Timers 39 Call Waiting 35 off 35 Calls from SMS messages 85 group, see Group calls icons 17 international 37 making 16 on hold 36 phone calls 16 Private calls 16, 19, 107 receiving 16 redialing 18, 106 remote PTT 116 Speed Dial 19 TTY, see TTY calls Turbo Dial 19 voice name 18 3-way 36 answering automatically 106 answering with any key 106 emergency 20 ending 16 from Contacts 18 from memo 43 from MMS messages 78 from Recent calls 17 Circuit data 40 Clock 106 CompanionPro 31 Contacts 18, 25 addressing MMS messages 74 capacity 30 CompanionPro 31 creating entries 27 creating MMS messages 73 deleting 29 editing entries 28 icons 25 International numbers 30 searching 26 showing all entries 27 showing only Private IDs 27 SIM card 25 storing fast 28 storing from idle screen 29 storing from Memo 29, 43 storing from MMS messages 79 storing from recent calls 23, 28 storing from SMS messages 86 type 23, 25 viewing 26 with non-i325 phones 31 D Display backlight 106 contrast 106 options 8 screen 7 Drafts 68, 75 see also MMS messages, drafts icons 76 E Email 25, 28, 40 Emergency calls 20 End key 1 F Faxes receiving 40 sending 40 G GPS Enabled 93 almanac data 98 best results 96 emergency calls 20, 94 map software 99 privacy options 98 security 99 viewing location 95 GPS PIN 108 GPS, see GPS Enabled Group calls 38, 107 making 38 off 39 receiving 39 H Handset, see phone Headset 116 I Icons calls 17 Contacts 25 drafts 76 Inbox 77 main menu 8 MOSMS messages 66 Recent calls 23 sent items 77 status 10 text entry 48 Idle screen 7 storing to Contacts 29 137 Index Inbox 68, 77 icons 77 International numbers 37 calling 37 storing 30 J Java applications deleting 88 memory 89, 104 K Keypad 1 locking 14, 107 L Language 106 Lists, see menus Locating Your SIM Card 2 M Memo 43 calling from 43 creating 43 editing 43 storing to Contacts 29, 43 viewing 43 138 Memory MMS messages 68 Java applications 89, 104 MMS messages 83 MOSMS messages 67 ring tones 46 voice records 103 Menu key 1, 8 Menus 8 context-sensitive 1, 8 main menu 8 Message center 57, 59, 61 see also messages for MMS 57 MMS messages 77 MOSMS messages 63 SMS messages 85 voice mail 61 Message notifications 59 setting options 59 Messages 57 see also voice mail, MOSMS messages, MMS messages, SMS messages, and net alerts receiving 59 calls from 78 creating 69 deleting 75, 76, 78, 82, 84 drafts 75 forwarding 76, 78 going to website 80 Inbox 77 locking 78 memory 83 message center 77 quick notes 75, 82 replying 72 sending 69, 75, 76 sent items 76 setting up 81 storing to Contacts 79 MOSMS messages 62 creating 63 deleting 66, 67 drafts 65 icons 66 memory 67 message center 63 outbox 65 quick notes 65 receiving 62 sending 63 sent messages 66 setting up 62 Mute 20 N Navigation key 1 Net alerts 86 Numeric mode 50 O Over-the-air programming 6 P Packet data 40 Passwords 108 Patent information 135 Pauses dialing 37 storing 30 Phone 1, 7 active line 106 locking 107 modem 40 off 5 on 5 setting up 2 Programming, over-the-air 6 PTT One Touch 19 One Touch, setting 37 PUK code 12 Q Quick notes 75, 82 see also MMS messages, Quick notes R Radio frequency 119 Recent calls 17, 23 addressing MMS messages 74 creating MMS messages 73 deleting 24 display time 108 icons 23 storing to Contacts 23, 28 viewing 23 Redialing 18, 106 Removing the Back Cover 2 Ring tones 25, 44 deleting 47 downloading 46 memory 46 off 44 setting 44 setting in Contacts 27, 45 silent 44 vibrate 44, 45 viewing assigned 46 Ringer 105 see also Ring tones off 105 S Safety 119 accessory 125 battery 124 driving 141 electromagnetic interference 122 medical devices 122 radio frequency 119 139 Index Security 107 Send key 1 Sent items 68, 76 see also MMS messages, sent items icons 77 Service, activating 5 Settings 106 resetting 108 SIM card 11, 13 Contacts 25 inserting 13 removing 14 with non-i325 phones 31 SIM PIN 11, 107 changing 11 default 11 entering 11 requirement 12 unblocking 12 SMS messages 62, 85 also see MOSMS messages 62 calling from 85 message center 85 140 receiving 85 storing to Contacts 86 Speakerphone 19 Speed Dial 19, 26, 28 Status messages 117 Symbols mode 50 T T9 Text Input, see text entry Talkgroups 38, 107 Text and numeric messages see SMS messages Text display area 7, 17 Text entry 48 Alpha mode 48 database 48, 49 icons 48 mode 48 Numeric mode 50 Symbols mode 50 Word mode 48 Trademark information 135 TTY calls 41 baud rate 42 making 41 mode 41 on 41 Turbo Dial 19 V Voice mail 61 receiving 61 sending calls to 16 setting up 61 Voice name 18, 26 Voice records 102 creating 102 deleting 103 labelling 102 locking 103 memory 103 playing 102 Volume, setting 105, 107 W Waits dialing 37 storing 30 Warranty 131 Word mode 48 Driving Safety Tips Safety is your most important call!
Your Motorola wireless telephone gives you the powerful ability to communicate by voice almost anywhere, anytime, wherever wireless phone service is available and safe conditions allow. But an important responsibility accompanies that benefits of wireless phones, one that every user must uphold. When driving a car, driving is your first responsibility. If you find it necessary to use your wireless phone while behind the wheel of a car, practice good common sense and remember the following tips:
Get to know your Motorola wireless phone and its features such as speed dial and redial. If available, these features help you to place your call without taking your attention off the road.
When available, use a hands-free device. If possible, add an additional layer of convenience to your wireless phone with one of the many Motorola Original hands-free accessories available today.
Position your wireless phone within easy reach. Be able to access your wireless phone without removing your eyes from the road. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time, if possible, let your voice mail answer it for you. Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, ice, and even heavy traffic can be hazardous. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. Jotting down a to do list or going through your address book takes attention away from your primary responsibility driving safely.
Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan calls when your car will be stationary. If you need to make a call while moving, dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue.
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and suspend conversations which have the potential to divert your attention away from the road. 141
Driving Safety Tips
Your phone can perform many other functions besides allowing you to make and receive calls. Do not let these features distract you from driving. Use them only when it is safe to do so.
Use your wireless phone to call for help. Dial 9-1-1 or other local emergency number in the case of fire, traffic accident or medical emergencies.
Use your wireless phone to help others in emergencies. If you see an auto accident, crime in progress or other serious emergency where lives are in danger, call 9-1-1 or other local emergency number, as you would want others to do for you.
Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless assistance number when necessary. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured, or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or other special non-emergency wireless number. 142
1 2 3 | Ex8b User Manual | Users Manual | 355.95 KiB |
MOTOtalk The MOTOtalk feature allows direct two-way phone-to-phone communications between two or more phones equipped for MOTOtalk. MOTOtalk does not require any network connection;
therefore, you can make and receive MOTOtalk calls in places where not network service is available. You can talk to anyone on your code and channel within your range. MOTOtalk allows you to:
use code or private mode operation use up to 10 channels communicate with standalone MOTOtalk radios Note: MOTOtalk is a new digital service and is not compatible with older Family Radio Services products such as Talkabout radios. Using MOTOtalk While using MOTOtalk, the idle screen will look similar to the on-network idle screen (see Phone Basics on page 7). The MOTOtalk icon on the display indicates that you are in MOTOtalk mode. s d1 Contcs S Mesg The tone emitted from your phone when using MOTOtalk will have 4 beeps and will be longer than the standard tone heard with on-network Private and Group calls. While using MOTOtalk, it will not be possible to communicate, transmit or receive data from the network. Activating MOTOtalk 1 Scroll to MOTOtalk on the main menu. 2 Select Go to MOTOtalk, youll see on the display: Switching to MOTOtalk please wait. Youll be on MOTOtalk screen. 23
MOTOtalk Setup Options The Setup Option allows you to setup options for MOTOtalk:
1 From the main menu, select MOTOtalk Options. 2 Select Setup. 3 Scroll to Direct Launch or State Tone. 4 Press A.
Direct Launch When you select MOTOtalk from the Main Menu and Direct Launch is ON, your phone launches directly to MOTOtalk. Otherwise, it displays an screen allowing you to change the MOTOtalk Options.
State Tone A tone will remind you periodically that you are in MOTOtalk. Your phone cannot receive incoming calls from the network while in MOTOtalk.+
MOTOtalk Icons MOTOtalk Options
(intermediate screen):
-Go To MOTOtalk (launch MOTOtalk)
-Setup
-Help MOTOtalk Type
-Code
-Channel MOTOtalk In Use No Signal - Indicates you are off-network and in MOTOtalk mode. 24 MOTOtalk Code Calls Setting Channels and Codes Channels Your phone has 10 channels and 15 codes. To have a conversation, all parties must be on the same channel and code. To set a channel:
1 From the idle screen, press A under Edit. 2 Select Channel. 3 Press A. 4 Scroll to the Channel you want to select. 5 Press A. Codes To set a code:
1 From the idle screen, press A under Edit. 2 Select Code. 3 Press A. 4 Scroll to the Code you want to select. 5 Press A. Note: All parties that are on your code and channel can hear your conversation. MOTOtalk Code Calls status icons d MT Ready Code:Receive All Channel:4 Edit S Contcs text area menu icon display options Receive All 1 You can set your phone with Code set to Receive All. Your phone will receive calls from any phone that has been set to the same Channel regardless of the Code (1-15). 2 If you receive a call while in Receive All, your phone display will change from Receive All to the Code on which the transmission was received. Note: You cannot initiate a call when the code is set to Receive All. If you press the PTT button when in Receive All it will ask you to enter a code. 25 MOTOtalk MOTOtalk Private Calls You can make MOTOtalk Private Calls as follows:
entering a valid MOTOtalk number (maximum of 10 digits) of the person you want to call. accessing a previously stored number or name from Contacts. accessing a valid number from Recent Calls. Note: You must on the same channel as the person you want to call in Private Call. Making a MOTOtalk Call 1 Enter the name or 10-digit number (for example, 9545555555) you want to call on your channel. 2 Press and hold the PTT button on the side of your phone. Begin talking after your phone emits the MOTOtalk tone. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. Note: If you get a bad key press tone, immediately following the talk permit tone, it means that nobody is in MOTOtalk mode, or they are in a different channel or out-of-range. Receiving a MOTOtalk Call 1 Wait for the caller to finish speaking. 26 2 Press and hold the PTT button on the side of your phone. Begin talking after your phone emits the MOTOtalk tone. 3 Release the PTT button to listen. Assigning a MOTOtalk Number in Contacts For information on assigning a MOTOtalk number to an existing entry in Contacts, see Contacts on page 29. Recent Calls For information on viewing, storing or deleting recent calls, see Recent Calls on page 27. Making Emergency Calls from MOTOtalk Your phone supports emergency calling. Emergency phone calls can be made even when you are not connected to the network as long as there is a network to connect to. Dial 911 to be connected to an emergency response center. If you are on an active call, you must end it before calling 911.
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2007-02-09 | 901 ~ 902 | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | Original Equipment |
2 | 2004-04-28 | 896 ~ 902 | TNE - Licensed Non-Broadcast Transmitter Held to Ear | |
3 | 902 ~ 928 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 | Effective |
2007-02-09
|
||||
1 2 3 |
2004-04-28
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Motorola Solutions, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0003778479
|
||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
8000 West Sunrise Blvd
|
||||
1 2 3 |
Ft Lauderdale, FL
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 | Grantee Code |
AZ4
|
||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Product Code |
89FT5830
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Name |
D******** Z******
|
||||
1 2 3 | Title |
Regulatory Compliance Manager
|
||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
95472********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
--********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
d******@motorolasolutions.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
Motorola Inc
|
||||
1 2 3 | Name |
M******** R******
|
||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
8000 West Sunrise Blvd
|
||||
1 2 3 |
Plantation, Florida 33322
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
Ft. Lauderdale, Florida 33322
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
954-4********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
954-7********
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
954-7********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
M******@motorola.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Class | PCE - PCS Licensed Transmitter held to ear | ||||
1 2 3 | TNE - Licensed Non-Broadcast Transmitter Held to Ear | |||||
1 2 3 | DSS - Part 15 Spread Spectrum Transmitter | |||||
1 2 3 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | iDEN i325 with MOTOtalk | ||||
1 2 3 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 2 3 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 2 3 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Grant Comments | Output is ERP, and must not exceed that tested for SAR compliance. This device may operate with the antennas tested for this filing in full-duplex held-to-ear (Parts 24, 90), push-to-talk held-to-face (Parts 15, 24, 90), and body-worn (Parts 15, 24, 90) configurations. SAR compliance was demonstrated for General Population/Uncontrolled RF exposure situations. Body-worn SAR compliance is limited to the specific belt-clip and earbud configurations tested for this filing, and to belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and must provide at least 2.5 cm separation between the device, including its antenna, and the user's body. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values are - Part 15: head 0.49 W/kg; body-worn 0.65 W/kg; Parts 24 & 90: head 1.06 W/kg; body-worn 1.09 W/kg. | ||||
1 2 3 | Output is at the antenna terminal of the device, and must not exceed that tested for SAR compliance. This transmitter may operate with the antennas tested for this filing in full-duplex held-to-ear (Part 90), push-to-talk held-to-face (Parts 15 & 90), and body-worn (Parts 15 & 90) configurations. SAR compliance was demonstrated for General Population/Uncontrolled RF exposure situations. Body-worn SAR compliance is limited to the specific belt-clip and earbud configurations tested for this filing, and to belt-clips, holsters or similar accessories that have no metallic component in the assembly and must provide at least 2.5 cm separation between the device, including its antenna, and the user's body. End-users must be informed of the body-worn operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The highest reported SAR values are - Part 15: head 0.49 W/kg; body-worn 0.65 W/kg; Part 90: head 1.06 W/kg; body-worn 1.09 W/kg. | |||||
1 2 3 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
Motorola
|
||||
1 2 3 | Name |
W****** E******
|
||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
954-7********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
954-7********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
F******@motorolasolutions.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 24D | 901.00000000 | 902.00000000 | 0.7170000 | 0.9000000000 ppm | 18K3D7W | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 9 | 806 | 825 | 0.7 | 0.5 ppm | 18K3D7W | Var | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 9 | 896 | 902 | 0.7 | 0.1 ppm | 18K3D7W | Var Power .08 to 700 mW | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | 902.00000000 | 928.00000000 | 0.8910000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC